Teach Yourself Lightroom - 2016 UK.pdf

T e a c h y o u r s e l f L i g h t r o o m

PLUS! 12 EXPERT VIDEO LESSONS LEARN LIGHTROOM AND CREATIVE CLOUD TODAY

224 PAGES OF PAGES OF EXPERT PHOTO ADVICE

Tea T each ch yo yours ursel elf f

Lightroom

Inside this issue...

Transform your photographs into stunning images using Lightroom CC and Lightroom 6

      

               

WATCH VIDEO www.bit.ly/ pmz66video

Look out for this logo whenever a tutorial has an accompanying video

elcome to the latest edition of our Lightroom bookazine! A great deal has happened within the Lightroom ecosyste ecosystem m and it’ i t’s rapidly becomin becoming g the tool of choi ce for professional photographers and keen amateurs alike. And now, more than ever, it makes sense to take advantage of A dobe’s Photography Photography Plan Pl an subscripti subscript i on package. package. There T here was a lot of resistance to thi s in i n the t he early early days, days, but i t’s become become clear clear that t hat the subscription model works really well. You get constant updates at no charge, the ability to synchronise your photos with Lightroom mobile on your smart devices and, and, of course, Photoshop itself – Lightroom’ Li ghtroom’s i ndispensible ndi spensible compani companion on – i s also also part of the packag package. e. But there is still plenty here for users of Lightroom 6, probably A dobe’s las l astt ‘perpetual l i cence’vers cence’versii on. Indeed In deed,, many of the imageimage-enha enhance ncement ment techniq techniques ues in our guide wi ll work wi th Lightroom 5 and earlier versions too. Lightroom Li ghtroom is a dual- purpose tool. It I t organi organises ses your imag i mages es and enhances them too, so we start out by looking at its i mport and catalogui catalogui ng tools. Li ghtroom’s editi ng tools grab the headli headli nes, but it’s often in the t he Library module that the really important work is done as you learn to sort, search and organise organise an everever- growi growi ng coll coll ection of photos. Next, we run through the image enhancement tools in Lightroom’ Li ghtroom’s Develop D evelop module, modul e, from basics such as cropping croppin g and straightening, to tone curve adjustments and the incre in creas asin ingly gly powerful powerful l ocalised ocalised adjustme adjustment nt tools. W e also also run throug t hrough h Lightro Li ghtroom’ om’s Print, M ap and and W eb modules, modules, as as i t’s no use collecti ng a vast vast li brary brary of photos if i f you don t do anythi ng with wi th them. th em. And we’ve a spec specii ally expanded secti section on on Li ghtroom’s incre in creasingly asingly i mportant mobile mobi le app. e hope you enjoy our new, new, updated updated guide guide to Lightroom and discover how it can help you to transform your own photos into images you can be proud of.

W

Rod Lawton, Editor

Teach you yours rse elf

Future Publishing Limited Quay House, The Ambury, Bath BA1 1UA www.digitalcameraworld.com Series Editor Editor

ChrisGeorge

Editor

Rod Lawton

Production Editor

Ella Taylor

Art Editor

Rodney Dive

FUTURE PUBLISHING LIMITED Editorial Director

Matt Pierce

Group Editor-i n-Chief

Chris George

Group Art Director

Rodney Dive

Managing Director

Joe McEvoy

ADVERTISING Account Director Matt Bailey

matt.bail ey futur enet.com

CIRCULATION & MARKETING MarketingDirector Sascha SaschaKimmel

sascha.kimmel sascha.kimmel futurenet .com

PRINT & PRODUCTION Production Co-ordinator Vivienne Calvert

vivienne.calvert vivienne.calvert futurenet.com futurenet.com

LICENSING Senior Licensing and Syndication Manager Matt Ellis

matt.elli matt.elli s futurenet.com futurenet.com

Phone: + 44 (0)1225442244 Printed in the UK by William Gibbons on behalf of Future. Distributed in the UK by Seymour Distribution Ltd, 2East Poult ry Avenue, London EC1A 9PT. Phone: + 44 (0)20 7429 4000

Future produces carefully targeted magazines, websites and events for people with a passion. Our portfolio includes more than 180 magazines, websites and events, and we export or license our publications to 90 countries around the world. Future plc is a public company q uoted on the London Stock Exchange (symbol: FUTR). C hief executive Zillah By ng-Thorn e N on-executi on-executive ve chairman P eter A llen Chief financial officer Penny Ladkin-Br Ladkin-Br and Tel:+ 4 4 (0 )12 25 4 4 22 4 4 w w w .fut ure plc .co m All information contained in this magazine is for informational purposes only and is,to the best of our know ledge,correct ledge,correct at the time of going going to pres s.Future Publishing Limited cannot accept any res ponsibility for errors or inaccuracies that occur.Read occur.Read ers are advised to contact manufacturers and retailers direct w ith regard to pricing. © Future Publishing Limited 2016.All rights rights reserved.N o part of this magazine may be used or reproduced w ithout the w ritten permission of the publisher.

e are committed toonly using magazine paper which is derived from well managed, certified forestry and chlorine-free manufacture. Future Publishing and its paper suppliers have been independently certified in accordance with the rules of the FSC (Forest Stewardship Council).

Teach yourself Lightroom CHAPTER 1

Import and sort images Introducing the Lightroom workspace ..................................... 8 Import your photos into Lightroom ......................................... 10 Find photos fast using embedded metadata .........................12 Organise images using Collections ...........................................14 Trigger a camera using Lightroom ............................................16 CHAPTER 2

The Library module

��

Introducing the Library module ................................................20 Sort and rate your images in Lightroom .................................22 Find images fast with keywords ................................................24 Put a name to a face .....................................................................26 Tag your images with location data ..........................................28 Apply quick photo fixes with Q uick Develop...........................30 CHAPTER 3

The Develop module

CHAPTER 8

��

Introducing the Develop module ..............................................34 Discover how to use the histogram ..........................................36 Use Smart Previews to edit remote images...........................38 Make basic colour adjustments ...............................................42 Crop and straighten your photographs..................................44

Creative eff ects

��

Bring your landscapes to life in Lightroom ...........................120 Get the gritty mono look........................................................... 124 Creative cross processing ........................................................126 Merge panoramas .....................................................................128 Make the best of your portraits ...............................................132 Create a spot-colour effect quickly.........................................136

CHAPTER 4 CHAPTER 9

Photo-fixing tools Tackle high-contrast monochrome scenes...........................50 Remove distortion caused by your lens ..................................54 Get a better perspective in your images .................................56 Reveal more midtone detail and texture .................................58 Remove unwanted colour casts ...............................................62

Print from Lightroom

��

Soft proof your images ..............................................................140 Introducing the Print module................................................... 142 Create a custom print layout ...................................................144 atermark your images ........................................................... 146 Manage your printer’s colours ................................................148

CHAPTER 5 CHAPTER 1

Selective adjustments Remove sensor spots in your images .....................................68 Dodge and burn in Lightroom ...................................................72 Editing with Auto Mask................................................................ 76 Use the Graduated Filter tool .....................................................80 Master the Radial Filter tool ........................................................82

Publi sh your images

��

Publish photos with Blurb......................................................... 152 Create a video slide show .........................................................156 Make a triptych from three similar pictures ........................160 Publish your pictures withLightroom web............................ 162 Create an online photo portfolio .............................................164

CHAPTER 6 CHAPTER 11

Special eff ects Master the HSL panel in Lightroom .........................................86 Make better black and white images ...................................... 90 Apply the split-tone effect to your mono images ..................94 Create HDR images .....................................................................96 Apply a Post Crop vignette .........................................................98 Add effects to video clips ..........................................................100

Advanced skil ls

�

Get creative with Lightroom..................................................... 170 Retouch your images likea pro ............................................... 178 Apply a vintage postcard look .................................................186 Turn day into night in Lightroom .............................................194 CHAPTER 12

CHAPTER 7

Lightroom Mobile Advanced editi ng

��

Introducing the Tone Curve panel ..........................................104 Make Tone Curve adjustments ...............................................106 Sharpen up your images ..........................................................108 Reduce noise while preserving detail .....................................112 Make changes in the Camera Calibration panel ..................114 Lightroom’s powerful editing presets..................................... 116

��

Sync Lightroom Mobile ............................................................204 orking with Lightroom Mobile............................................. 206 Sort your Library with Lightroom Mobile ............................208 Enhance images with Lightroom Mobile ..............................210 Share your photos with Lightroom Mobile ...........................212 Shooting super images with Lightroom Mobile ..................216 Lightroom Mobile s powerful editing tools ..........................220

Teach yourself Lightroom IMPORT AND SORT IMAGES

6

T

h yo

L

IMPORT AND SORT IMAGES

t t

g e

Get started in Lightroom fast by learning the best ways to import and organise your images

08

Introducing the Lightroom workspace

G et to know the generallayout and pur pose ofLi ghtroom’s photo organi sing,editi ng and shari ng modu les

10

Import your photos into Lightroom

12

Find photos fast using embedded metadata

D iscover how to import your photos and v id eo clip s from a mem ory card ,camera or hard drive into L ightroom

14

Organise images using Collections

16

Trigger a camera using Lightroom

Learn how to sort your photos into themed C ollection s,and use Smar t C ollection s to aut omat i cally file you r shots for you

U se Li ghtroom to controla camera that’s tethered to you r comput er,and automati cally add keyw ords as you i mport the pictures

Protect your images by assigni ng your copyright and addin g your contact details to every pi ctur e’s metad ata

7

h

Lightr oom

y o

IM P O R T A N D S O R T IM A G ES GET THE FILES HERE:

e

http://bit .ly/tylr2016

L

o r

a c e

G et to know the general layout and purpose of Lightroom’s photo organising,editing and sharing modules hotoshop Lightroom com bines the

P

profession al aw -p ocessi g tool n the m ore expen sive Photoshop CC w th t e asset-o gan si

pow ers of he ch eaper Photoshop Elem ents. I t also has p en y of un qu e ph oto-f xi g and organ si g too s of ts ow

,as yo

discover

hi e w orking through his boo k. On e o

e biggest chal en ges that w e face

as digi alp ho ograph ers is m anaging ou col ect on s of

ages.Ligh

oo m en ables

you o take the tedium ou t of asset 8

anagem ent.It provides ea y w ays o add keyw ords to batches of hem

es as you

can create them ed col ect on s,or even set

po rt

om a m em ory ca d,so you can f nd

co ect f es that m eet specifc criteria –

speci c i ages m ore qu ckly n the future. e’lloo k at Lightroo

s asset

anagem ent

un ct on s in m ore deta lin ch apter You

ay be dealng w

h thousands of ves.

oo m en ables you o gather stray ph otos n a variety of

s layout.

Develop, because these enable yo u o

to its Catalog regardless o the r l cati and organise them

an overview of Lightroo

re

t f st w e’lgive y ou

odu es.Th e m ain m odu es a e Library and

ages th at are scattered ac oss ol ers Ligh

on this in a few pages.B

Lightroo m has seven k ey w orkspaces,ca ed

o.

on you r PC as w ellas on external hard d

up Sm art Col ect on s,w hich autom at cal

ays.Yo

s,

po rt

organise and process you r pho os.T he other odu es a e M ap,Bo ok,S deshow ,Pr nt and eb.Check out our anno ated grab t am

arise yo

sel

th the

od ule p cker

Teach yourself Lightroom IMPORT AND SORT IMAGES

Lightroom Anatomy M odule picker Get to know the seven key modules in Lightroom’s workspace 1 LIBRARY

3

Lightroom opens in the Library module. The Library module is where you import and organise your digital photos. You can also tweak their colours and tones using the Q uick Develop panel.

5

1 4

2

2 DEVELOP

6

7

The Develop module is your digital darkroom. Here you can fix problems relating to colour, tone and composition. This module also has a collection of selective raw editing tools.

3 MAP If your camera has the capacity to geo-tag photos with GPS coordinates you can see images on a map according to where they were captured. You can also use Lightroom to manually geo-tag photos.

4 BOOK Once you’ve processed your pi ctures, you may want to share them in a photo book. This module enables you to lay out the book using handy templates, and export the book to a publisher who will produce a hard copy.

5 SLIDESHOW

6 PRINT

7 WEB

In this module you can present your photos as a slick slide show. In chapter ten we’ll look at this module in more detail, and show you how to add music and transitions to your show, and how to watermark your images to protect them.

In chapter nine we’ll show you how to produce perfect prints using the tools and templates in this module. This chapter will also demonstrate how to make sure that what you see on screen looks the same in print using Lightroom’s soft-proofing tools.

This handy module provides you with a host of templates so that you can share your photos online in interactive and attractive web galleries. Lightroom enables you to make web galleries without any coding knowledge at all.

KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS

Underst�nd�n�…

PAN EL CON TROL IN LIGH TR O O M Each Lightroom module has a range of panels, such as the Library module’s eywording panel [1]. Some panels may be more useful to you than others, so you can minimise the ones you want to hide by clicking these icons [2]. The hidden panels will reappear when you move the cursor near the sides (or top and

bottom) of the screen. If you want less clutter and to get rid of those displays that you don t use, then right-click a panel to activate a context-sensitive pop-up menu. Clear any panels [3] that you don’t often use to make more space. The Solo Mode [4] option means that you have one open panel at a time.

1

3 4 2

ith seven modules to explore, it’s worth mastering the keyboard shortcuts that can summon each module with a few taps. The seven modules can be summoned with sensibly-numbered keyboard shortcuts that relate to the order in which they appear at the top of the workspace. Use Cmd/Ctrl+Alt+1 to access the Library module, Cmd/Ctrl+Alt+2 for the Develop module, Cmd/Ctrl+Alt+3 for Map, Cmd/Ctrl+Alt+4 for Book, Cmd/ Ctrl+Alt+5 for Slideshow, Cmd/ Ctrl+Alt+6 for Print, and Cmd/ Ctrl+Alt+7 for W eb. hen you’re using Lightroom, you’ll spend most of your t ime in the Develop module, so you can also jump straight there with a snappier tap of the D key.

9

Teach your sel fLightroom IM P O R T A N D S O R T IM A G ES GET THE FILES HERE:


Import your photos into Lightroom D iscover how to import images and video clips from a memory card or hard drive into Lightroom

Choose a source b u a n S a s o n 10

L g h t ro o m c o e c t s f t h e m n s C a t a lo g . t to n a t t e b o t t o m - le f t o d V d e o f ro m h e m a in u c e s e c t io n , b r o w s e t h e a m e m o r y c a r d , y o u r c a m a n e r n a l o r e x t e r a l

e s f ro m e r la f t h e i e n u ) f i e s a e ra if a rd d r

Check or uncheck? a v a r ie u n c h i n g n t e r fa c e n p o n d f o ld e t ’s p l g iv e .

t y o L g ( r r t s a g e d

f s o u r c h t ro o c h o o s e n d o w n d c h o o , o r a

e s a n d s p l a y s , c l c k t h e I m p o r t F e > I m o r t Po t o s l a p p e a r. n h e s e a s o u c e s u c h f o ld e r o f p h o o s

s p a c

a p iz e f o r a c k U n c h h o t o s th v i g n e t te h a n g e to

h e a s s e t p e a r a s c l o s e r l e c k A l a t y o u a r o u n d e n a b le

s n t h e s e le c te d s o c e fo ld e r o r e m o r y c a rd w th u b n a i s . Us e t h e s l d e r to c re a s e t h e t h u b n a i . l t h e f i e s a r e c h e c k e d a u t o m a t ic a l y . Y u c a n a n d h e n a n u a l y c h e c k h e h u b n a i s o f a ll h e a n t to i p o r t. h e u n c h e c k e d t h u m b n a i s w l h a v e t h e ir e d g e s . f y o u h o d d o w n t , t h e b u t to n s w y o u o c h e c k o r u n c h e c k a n y v id e o e s .

Teach yourself IMPORT AND SORT IMAGES

3

Copy or Add?

5

Process while importing

If you’re import in g fil es from a memory card,click C opy.T his w ill copy t hem to a chosen location on your comp uter’s hard dri ve (such as your Pict ures fold er),or onto an external hard dr ive. It w ill t hen impor t the copied photos in to Lightroom’s C atalog.If you’re import in g fil es from a folder on an in ternal or external hard drive,click A dd.T his w ill add them to Lightroom’s C atalog w ithout physically movin g or copyin g them,w hich saves dis c space.

You can batch process files as you import them.By checking the Buil d Smart Preview s box you can edit copies of a photo even if t he extern al hard drive that it ’s stored on has been di sconn ected.You can also apply p reset D evelop Setti ngs to every photo,w hich enables you to creatively process them or apply automatic tonal corrections as they are imported.W e’ll look at w ays to batch process imp orted files in more detail l ater i n t his chapter.

4

Loupe or Grid view?

6

Import the images

By default you w ill s ee the targeted folder’s content as thumbnails in the G rid vi ew.T o see a particular photo more clearly,either cli ck the Loupe view icon or double click the thumbnail to take it into the Loupe view.You can then tick the Includ e in Import box if you w ant to add the photo to Li ghtroom’s C atalog.Press G to go back to G rid view,w here you can see the folder ’s contents as thumbn ails.

O nce you’ve decided w hich photos you w ant to include in Lightroom’s C atalog,and you’ve chosen any File H andli ng or D evelop Settings presets,click Import.A progress bar w ill i ndicate that the files are being imported into the C atalog from their current location.Lightroom w ill then generate standard previews of each fil e. In our example w e chose not to apply any Smart Preview or D evelop Setti ngs presets,because w e’ll look at these opti ons later. 11

h

Lightr oom

y o

IM P O R T A N D S O R T IM A G ES GET THE FILES HERE:


Find photos f ast usingmetadata P rotect your images by as signing your copyright and adding your contact details to every picture’s metadata t’s com

I

on pract ce to sh are you r digi alp otos

as elect on c cop es.Y ou hem

o clents,pu

gh t do so by em ai

et ork si e or presen ti g t em

n y ou r on ne ol

er

t en s up ,b ecau se it’s easy for others o m ake an electron

thou t yo u b ei g credited. Lightroo

or p ub shed

s copyrighted an d

thou t you bei g credi ed or paid or i .A s the e i age,yo u ow n the cop yrigh t o it,so other ss on o u se i .To h elp them do so you

can assign yo ur co py righ t detais to the p ho o’s m etadata. hen you r cam era processes an i age to d escr be i

po

s M etadata pan elis designed o en able you

o add

ust seek you r per

herever he i age goes,the

etais i to the m etadata,yo r ph oto is less l kely to b e u sed

cop y.T his can lead to scenarios w he e you r w ork is shared creator of

12

er speed an d aperture setti g.T his m etadata is stored

th the i age f e,so that

etadata goes too .B y i sert g you r copy righ t and con act

ng hem on you r social

gal ery.On ce you ve shared a ph oto yo u can t con

shu

ant infor

at on such as w hether the p ho

ho crea ed i .W e’lshow you how

edit a ph oto’s m etadata and

en urn that

orm at on

a m etadata preset,so that yo u can app y yo r copy righ detais to m ul ple p ho os w yo u h ow

h a few cl cks.W e’ lalso sh ow

o q uickly ap ply p esets to m ultiple ph otos as

colou s an d on es,it also includ es i orm at on abo t the

you

cam era setti gs used to capture he p ho o,su ch as t

picture p ocessi g w orkf ow

po rt hem ,w hich is a hu ge t

e-saving step in yo ur

Teach yourself IMPORT AND SORT IMAGES

1

Filter using metadata

In the Library module,click a thumbnail.In the righthand panel,toggle open the M etadata tab.H ere you’ll see information such as the C apture D ate.If you cli ck the arrow to the right of the ISO Speed Rating you can di splay all the other photos captured using the same setting.

3

Add more personal details

5

Assign multiple presets

T o add more d etail ed i nf orm ation ,cli ck t he D efault drop-dow n menu to the left of the M etadata panel’s label and choose IPT C .T his gives you more text fields to edit, so you can add your address and w ebsite details.T his w ill help others contact you should they w ish to use your image.

H old dow n Shift and click on images to select multiple thumbnails in L ightroom’s G rid view.G o to the Preset drop-dow n menu on the M etadata tab and choose the custom preset you created in the previous step.A ny d etails you included w ill be added to the selected photos.

2

Add the copyright status

4

Make a metadata preset

6

Assign presets on import

D etails such as ISO Speed rating and the Lens used can’t be altered,but t here are blank f ields that you can type in to add to the selected photo’s metadata.T ype your name into the photo’s C opyri ght field.S et the C opyri ght Status drop-dow n menu to C opyrighted (or Publi c D omain).

T o s peed thi ngs u p,cli ck t he M etadata panel ’s Pr eset drop-dow n menu and choose Edit Preset.C ontinue editing the fields and then choose Save C urrent S ettings as N ew Preset from the Edit M etadata Preset w indow ’s dropdow n menu.Click D one.Click Save A s.N ame the Preset.

You can assign your copyright details to every photo as you import it.C lick Import and brow se to the folder or memory card that you w ant to import.In the A pply D uring Import Panel,open the M etadata drop-dow n menu and choose the desired custom preset . 13

Teach your sel fPhotoshop IM P O R T A N D S O R T IM A G ES GET THE FILES HERE:


Organise images using Collections Learn how to sort your photos into themed C ollections,and use S mart C ollections to automatically file your shots for you h a n k s t o d g i a l c a m e ra s , y o u c a n g e n e ra t t h o s a n s o f p h o t o g a p s in a r e la t iv e l y s h o r t t i e . L g h t ro o m g a t h e s i a g e s f o m u l p l o l e r s a n d e x t e r n a l h a r d d r iv e s a n d s t o r e s a l o t h e m n s C a t a l o g . Yo u g h t h a v e t o s p e n d a lo n g t i s c ro l g t h r o u g h h e L b r a ry o d u l e ’s i p o r t e d t h u m b n a i a g e s in s e a rc h o f a s p e c i c p h o o . h e a ta lo g p a n e l h a s t h e o t io n t o d i s p a y a l l t h e p o t o s i n t h e C a t a lo g , o r y o u c a n a r r o w h i n g s d o w n b y c l c k i g t h e Pe v i o u s I p o r t a b e l o s e e y o u r m o s t re c e n t a d d o n s to t h e C a t a lo g . n c h a p e r t o e ’ l o o k i n d e t a il a t t e w a y s L g h t ro o L b r a ry m o d u le e n a b e s y o u o o g a n s e y o u r a g e s u s i a ra n g e o f to o s a n d c o m a n d s . Ho w e v e r, e ’ l p r e - e m p t t h a t c h a p e r b y i o d u c i g y o u o a q c k a n d e f fe c t v e w a y o b e g in o g a n s in g a n d d s p la y i g y o u r i p o r te d p o t o s .

T

Make a Quick Collection a a n d s c o f t h e a n d s c 14

h e C a t Q c k a p e - t h t h u b a p e - t h

a lo C o e m n a e m

g p l le e d i s e d

a n e c t io p h a n d p

l o n t h e le ft n a b e l. o q o t o s t o a Q p r e s s B . He o t o s to g e t h e

o f t c k l c k r e w e r in a

e L y a d o l e ’v e Q

b r d c t c o c

n b y g o e a n a lo g u e d a y s w e ’d g a t e r o u r fa v o u r i e p r i n t o a lb u s s o th a t w e c o u ld b o w s e th r o u g h h e i a g e s b u s te n d e d t o c o l e c t a n d p r e se n t o u r p h o o s a c c o rd in g o t h e m e s ( c h a s a w e d d i n g o r a h o a y ). s t a d t io n a l o d e l o f s o r i g a n d a c c e s s i g i a g e s c a n b e a p p l e d t o t h e p h o t o g r a p h s in t h e L g h t ro o m L b r a ry o d u l e , c o u r te s y o t h e C o l e c t io n p a n e l n t h is w a lk t h r o u g h e ’ l s h o w y o u q c k w a y s to g a t h e r s p e c i c p o t o s t o C o l le c t io n s , s o t h a t y o u c a n s p l a a s m a l l o l le c t i o n n t h e Gr i d v i e w s te a d o f h a v i g t o s c ro ll o u g h h o s a n d s o f t h u m b n a i s in t h e m a in C a t a lo g . Yo u c a n c r e a t e a s a n y o l e c t io n s a s y o u k e . W e ’ l a ls o d e m o n s t a te h o w o g e t L g h o o m o a u o m a t c a l y c r e a t e c t i s a c c o r d i g t o s p e c i c m e t a d a t a c r t e r ia , s i g t h e a p t ly n a m e d S a r t C o l e c t o n s t a b .

Save the Quick Collection a ry m o o r s u io n , c l l e c t e d k C o l e

d

e h a s p p l ie d c k e a c h s i c t io n

Go t o a b e l. g a t h e r e d . Rg t h e S v e Q e c t i .

t h e h e h t c k c k

C a t a lo g p a e l a n d c l c k t h e Gr i d v e w l o w d i sp l ay c l c k t h e Q c k C o l le c t io n o l le c t i o n d o . La b e l t S v e .

Q c k o l le c t i o n t h e a g e s y o a b e l t o s u m o n La n s c a p

Teach yourself Photoshop IMPORT AND SORT IMAGES

3 La

S et as Target C ollecti on Th e Q uick Colect on w

lem pty once you ve added

the pho os to their ow n Collection .Cl ck o n th scape Co ection ’to see its co tents.Righ -cl ck th

Co ection abeland ch oo se Set As Target Co ecti

.C ck

the AllPh otographs option o see allthe p ho os agai

5

C reat e new C ollections To create n ew Collection s,clck the + con o the right of he Col ect on s pan el.Yo u can set any new

Co ection s up to be Target Co ection s.Y ou can a so creat your o

n

art Collection s to f d

es that m atch specif

4

U se the Painter tool ow

hen you se ect a thum bnailand p ess B,the

ph oto w

lb e add ed to the n ew Target Colect on

stead of the d efault

uick Co ection .Y ou can also cl ck

the Painter con and set he Paint drop-d ow n Collection .Cl ck the Pai er too lo n any thu

6

enu

o T arget

bn ailto ad d it

C reat e a S mar t C ollection Cl ck + and cho ose Crea e S

art Colect on .N am e i

High I SO Sp eed’ Tick I nside Co ect on Set and cho ose

Sm art Colect on s.Set M atch to A ny.Change the Rat ng

crieria such as a high I SO setti g,for exam ple.

Range op

on and pu t n a suitable range,such as300

7

8

art Collection s can also o gan se i ages by thei

S ee your custom C ollecti on The ‘H gh I SO ’Sm art Collection that

sts allo the pho os

atch the ru es you set.Clck the ‘H gh I SO

Sp eed’labelan d he ph otos w

lap pear in the grid view .Cl ck

on a ph oto and loo k in the M etadata pan el.T his pho o w have a h gh I SO, so it m eets the rules you set

enu

o Cam era In o and choose IS O Sp eed Rat ng.Ch oose the I s In o 30

S elect p hotos via their shape shap e.To display o

y p ortrait-orien ed ph otos in the

Libra y m od ule,create a new Sm art Col ect on .S crolld ow n to Size and cho ose A spect Ra o.Fi st cho ose I s f om

he second

en u and Port ait f om the thi d. Cl ck C eate.

15

Teach yourself Lightroom IMPORT AND SORT IMAGES GET THE FILES HERE http://bit.ly/tylr2016

16

T

h yo

L

IMPORT AND SORT IMAGES

g e r a Use Lightroom to control a camera that’s tethered to your computer, and automatically add keywords as you import fyou do a lot of studio-based shooting then you may fin d i t u seful to conn ect your camera di rectly in to your laptop or desktop computer vi a a U SB cable and i mpor t each photograph strai ght in to L ight roo m’s C atalog as you tr i gger t he camer a’s shu tt er. By tethering the camera to your computer and running Li ghtroom you can streamlin e the produ ction stage ofyour w ork flow ,because you w on’t n eed to im por t a large batch of phot os from a memor y card later on .

I

Name the session

1

C onn ect your camera to your PC ,and choose File> Tethered C apture>Start Tethered C apture.In the T ethered C apture Setti ngs w indow ,type a Session N ame. T ick Segment Photos B y Sh ots to create sub folders.C hoose Session N ame – Sequence from the N aming menu.

3

Add copyright information

You can add copyright information as you import each photo by clicking the M etadata drop-dow n menu and choosin g a preset.You can also type keyw ords t hat w illhelp you locate the im por ted p hoto s later (see th e next chapt er for more on keyw ords).C lick O K .

Look in g at an im por ted p hotograph on a laptop’s larger screen or a mon it or m eans that you can i mmedi ately spot pr oblems such as a lack of focus mor e easily t han you could i f you w ere looki ng at t he same photo on the camera’s smaller LC D di splay.T hi s gives you t he opp or tun it y t o adjust t he camera’s setti ngs and re-take the photo to capture a sharper version ther e and th en (in stead of havin g to re-do the shoot at a later date).W e’llshow you how to set up and u se Lightroom’s Tethered capture Settings here…

2

Choose a destination

4

Capture and import images

If you choose a nami ng meth od t hat in clud es a num eri calsequence,type a suitable Star t N umb er (such as �).T he im por ted files w illbe sent t o your Pi ctur es folder before bei ng added t o Li ghtr oom’s C atalog,but you can click C hoose and select anot her destin ation i fr equir ed.

T he Tethered C apture controlbar show s you the current camera settings such as the shutter speed and apertu re.C lick the D evelop Setti ngs drop -dow n menu t o have Li ghtroom change the colour s and ton es ofphot os as they are impor ted.Click the Shutter button to take a photo. 17

Teach yourself Lightroom THE LIBRARY MODULE

18

T

L

h yo

THE LIBRARY MODULE

e L o d u l

Locate, rate, give images keywords and apply quick photo fixes with Lightroom’s Library module

20

Introducing the Library module

22

Sort and rate your images in Lightroom

24

Find images fast with keywords

D iscover the key featu res of the L ibr ary m odule,and customise it to create a cleaner -looki ng w or kspace

U se the tools in the Li brary mod ule to start organising your photos to make them easier to manage

Identi fy p arti cular p ictur es by addi ng keyw ord s to the metadata,then search for specific im ages using keyw ord filters

26

Put a name to a face

28

Tag your images with location data

30

Apply quick photo fixes with Quick Develop

U se the facialr ecogni ti on tools in Li ghtroom ’s Lib rary m odu le to detect and organi se your por traits and snaps

U se the G PS data embedded in your images to pi npoi nt the shooting location ofa photo in the M ap module

U se the Q uick D evelop panelto overcome common pr oblems w it h colour and ton e w hile you organi se your photos

19

h

Lightr oom

y o

T H E L IB R A R Y M O D U L E GET THE FILES HERE:


Intr oducingthe Libr arymodul e D iscover the key features of the Library module, and customise it to create a cleaner-looking w orkspace n he p eviou s chapter

I

dem on st ated how

they m ay b e scat ered across a variety o olders and exter alh ard drives.W

o i port

ages into Lightroom .W e also ou ched on

assets by p aci g them

ays o o ganise your n Collection s.I n th

ch ap er w e’ ld elve d eep er i to t e Librar odu e and dem on st ate how

rum

s Libra y

od ule,you d have to

age arou nd n ho se separate folders

oo ki g or sp eci c p ho os.L gh troo m gathe assets together an d p aces them

t can h elp you

o m anage and edi )yo ur i ages.You m ay have thou sand s of ph otos to d ealw

Lightroo

h,and

ou

n its Catalog

so that they are allu nd er one oo .Yo u can hen see your i ages m ore con veniently i he L bra y m od ule.

On

s spread w e i trod ce the k ey pan el

and oo s in he Library m od ule,so you can am

arise yo

exp ain ho w

sel

th i s layo t.W e also

o ch ang e the d efault ayou t so

you can hide pan els un

lyou need them

e’lthen m ove on to show you how organise you r i ages using keyw ords and star at gs,and

ag them

e location n

h the co ordi ates of

hich they w ere captured

At a gl ance The Libr ar ymodul e G et to know the key features of Lightroom’s organising w orkspace 4 HISTOGRAM W hen you click a photo’s thumb nail (or d ouble click to view it in the Loup e view ),you can see the image’s spread oftones in the histogram w indow.This un du latin g grap h ena bles you to an alyse and fix expo sure-related pr oblems,as w e’lldemonstrate in chap ter three.

4

1

5 KEYWORDING PANEL 5

6

2

6 METADATA

3

20

H ere you can assign keyw ords to a phot o to he lp you find it m ore e asily in t he futu re.Like allpane ls,it can b e toggled o pe n or collap sed b y clicki ng the litt le tr ian gle ico n.Ifyou ri ght c lick a pan elyou can clear u nw anted panels from the p op-up m enu.

1 FOLDERS PANEL

2 IMAGE DISPLAY

3 TOOLBAR

Thi s pan elshow s you allthe folder s linked to L ightro om’s C atalog.Right click a folder and choose S ynchr onize Folder to up date it.

Photograp hs and video clips that have been impor ted into the Library module ap pear in the image display area as thum bn ails.

Th e icons in t he Toolbar enab le you to add rat ings,flag p hotos for rejection and d isplay them by a ran ge ofcriteria such as C apture Time.

H ere you can discover lots of information about how a photo w as captur ed,includin g camera settings such as the ISO and a pert ure values. You can use Lightroom to add extra information to a photo’s metad ata,such as keywords and G PS coordinates.


A t a glance The Library w orkspace Create a cleaner workspace and compare photos in the Survey view

1

5 2

3

6 4

1 HIDE OR SHOW

4 FILMSTRIP

If you click t he little triangl e icons by the Li brary module’s side or top panels, you can make them vanish and create more space to work in. To summon a panel, simply slide the mouse to the appropriate edge of the screen.

hen using the Survey or Compare views, it’s handy to be able to access al l the Library module’s thumbnails too. To do so, c lick the triangle at the bottom of the workspace to summon the Filmstrip. This offers an alternative to the Grid view.

2 FULL SCREEN

5 SELECT

Press Shift+F to cycle through different screen options. Here we’ve used this shortcut to hide the top menu bar. Press F to make the currently selected thumbnail fill the screen. W e’ve also collapsed the Module picker to make more space.

Shift click in the Filmstrip to select a range of thumbnails to compare in the Survey view. The first thumbnail selected is the active photo. It will display a white border. To remove a photo from the Survey view, click the X ico n.

3 SURVEY VIEW

6 SORT

The Survey view enables you to compare a selection of photos as larger thumbnails. Shift click to select a range of photos to survey. If you only want to compare two photos, click the Compare view icon immediately to the left of the Survey icon.

You can begin to sort your photos by clicking icons or adding ratings. Here we’ve ticked the K eep flag icon for this photo. e’ve also added four stars by clicking the icons below the image. There’s much more o n sorting o n the following pages.

21

Teach your sel fLightroom T H E L IB R A R Y M O D U L E GET THE FILES HERE:


Sort and rate your images U se the tools in the Library module to start organising your photos to make them easier to manage f y o u v e i p o r te d h o u s a n d s o f p h o o s i n t o L g h t ro o s L b r a y o d u le , y o u a y b e d a u n e d b y t h e c h a l e n g e o f g s p e c i c f e s w e n y o e e d t h e m . F r t u n a t e ly , L g h t ro o m s p a c k e d f to o s a n d c o m a n d s t h a t a re d e s ig n e d o h e lp y o u s e p a ra t h e w h e a t f o m h e c h a f . n c h a p te r o n e w e d e m o n s t a te d o w o a d d s e le c te d p o t o s to C o l e c t o n s , s o y o u c o u l ro u p a g e s t o g e t h e r in a s i a r w a y t o p t i g p r i s i p h o o a lb u m . W e a ls o d e m o n s t a t e d h o w o u s e t h e S a r o l le c t i s f e a t u r e t o c o e c t a n d s p a y f i e s a c c r d i g t o p e c i c m e t a d a t a c r it e r a , s u c h a s w e t h e r t h e y a d a p o r t r a i r la n s c a p e a s p e c t r a t io , r e x a m e . L g h t r m s p a y s a l o r t u m b n a i s a c c o rd i g to t h e d a te t h e y w e re c a p t u re d , s o

I

o

g a s y

Change the sorting options Pe s s G t h e n h e h e t o p . Fo m p o p - u p e n u a k in g h e h i 22

o d y h e o g h e

s p a y t h e Gr e re c a p tu r ed T o o b a r at c h a n g e th e w s t - ra te d p h o

id

e w . P t o s , h h e n e w e h e b o t to m y o u a y p h o to s a re d t o s a p p e a r at th

a r e l r th u c a n u is p la e o p

is t e b s e y ed .

y o p e

o u c a n s c ro ll b a c k t h r o u g h e a n d r e ly o n y o u r e m o r y f w h e n p a r t c u la r i a g e s w e re ta k e n . s th i s c h a p e r r o g r e s s e s , e ’ l s h o w y o u a l e r n a t iv e a n d u c h o r e f f c ie n t w a y s t o o r g a n s e a n d s e a r c h f o r f e s . W e ’ l s ta r t b y e x a m g q u c k a n d e a s y w a y s to s o r t y o u r p h o o s u s i g r at i g s a n d a g s , s o y o u c a n b e g in a l y - c o t r l r o c e s s b y g h g h t i g y o r a v o r it e s , h i le m a r k i g o t h e r s f o r r e j e c t io n . W e ’ l a l s o s h o w y o u h o o t e r t e p o t o s n t h e Gr i d v i e w o d i s p l a y i m a g e s t h a t a t c h s p e c i c c r i e r ia c o n t a i e d n e a c h o t o ’s m e t a d a t a . W e ’ l t h e n o v e o n a te r in t h is c h a p e r to e x p l o r e m o r e a d v a n c e d w a y s o f o r g a n is i g p o t o s , u s i g t o o ls s u c h a s k e y w o r d s a n d g e o - t a g g in g .

Rate your photos d n a i s a t th e S r t , s u c h a s

o r a te a p o t o , c l c k i ts t h u t h e t h u b n a il o a s s ig n b e t w e r n a t iv e l y , y o u c a n t a p o e o f t h a s t a r ra t i g i c o n n t h e a r . Y h u b n a i l a n d u s e t h e S t Ra t n g c

b n a i , t e e n z e ro e u m b e u c a n a ls o m a n d

h e n c l c a n d v r k e y s o o r ig h t .

k b e s r c c l

e lo w t a rs . l c k c k

Teach yourself THE LIBRARY MODULE

3

Check the quality

5

Remove or delete?

7

Colour-code your pictures

D ouble-click a thumbnail (or press E )to take the photo int o Loupe view .You can then click the image to zoom into a �:� view that w ill show you the image at ��% . If you w ant to keep the photo,tick t he Set as Pick fl ag icon in the T oolbar.O therw ise,click the Set as R ejected fl ag.

W hen you choose to delete a photo,you have tw o options.If you click R emove,it w ill stay in its original folder on your PC ,but it w ill vanish from Lightroom’s C atalog.To permanently delete it from its original folder, click the D elete from D isk option.

T he Fi lter B ar also di spl ays p hotos accordi ng to colour labels.C lick the C ustom Filter menu and choose Filters O ff.T his w ill disp lay all the photos.To assign a coloured label to a photo,simply right-click its thumbnail,choose Set C olor Label,and choose a colour from t he list.

4

Delete the rejected files

6

Sort using filters

8

Stack images to save screen space

You can use the Toolbar’s Sort menu to dis play the picked pictures at the top of the G rid view. Photos t hat have been flagged as R ejects w ill appear as greyed out thumbnails at the bottom of the G rid vi ew.C hoose Photo>D elete Rejected Photos to remove them.

G o to V iew >Show Filter Bar.T ick A ttribute.Click the Pick icon to display photos that have been flagged.You can also choose to display photos that have been rated greater than or equal to a specific star rating.You can refine the filter results by clicking M etadata and choosing an attribute.

You may have a collection of similar photos cluttering the w orkspace.T o save space,Shift-click each similar thumbnail,then right-click and choose Stacking>G roup in to Stack.You can t hen click the right of a collaps ed stack’s thumbnail to expand i t,or left to collapse it. 23

h

Lightr oom

y o



Find images with keywor ds Identify particular pictures by adding keyw ords to the metadata, then search for sp ecific images using keyw ord filters particu ar pict

ust loo ked at w ays to begin sort g yo ur

W

collection of ph otos by ad an d

g rati gs and

si g the r existi g m etadata to

ags,

er ph otos

acco rdi g to certain criteria,s ch as asp ect rati

or cam era m od el.Later n this chap er w e’llearn ho w ocate ph otos accordi g to w he e they w ere captured,than ks o the G PS coo di ates stored in

g to

colou ed abe s or sh oo ti g location s,b t t ese too s w on y go so far.To fi d a p oto acco rdi g to i s act alsubject at er,w e could try to rem em ber

hen t

hen scrolld ow n through he G rid v ew den

y

s thu

bn ai .A

o o ur p otos an d then 24

as taken and

n an at em pt t

ernatively,w e co uld add keyw ords se Ligh troo

stan t.K eyw ords are a series of

n the p ho o’s m etadata,so that w hen or up oad ed,

e f e is shared

e keyw ords rem ain attached o it.Th s can

be esp ecialy u sef li yo u w ant to selly ou r

ork as stock

ph otography,because p otentialbu yers can u se keyw ords t d y ou r ph oto via search en gi es.

e m etadata.

I t’s h an dy to be ab e to search or fies acco

es in an

ords that describe the con en t of a ph oto.T hey are s ored

s Fi er bar to fi d the

In

his w alkthrough

e’lshow you how

om sc atch,and hen use the h andy ass gn com

on keyw ords to p ho os w

o crea e keyw ords

eyw ord S et panelto h just a ew clcks.

It m ay seem un necessa y i you d on t have m any ph otos t begin

h,b ut the m ore ef ort you pu t nto add ng keyw ords

o yo ur p ho os,the easier they Let

lb e to fi d n the future.

eyw ords are K ng’b e you r i age-organising

antra!


1

Assign keywords on import

You can assign keywords to a batch of photos when you import them into Lightroom’s Catalog. Go to the A pply Duri ng Import panel and type into the K eywords field. Separate each keyword with a comma. Lightroom will remember previous keywords and suggest them as you type.

3

Manually assign keywords

5

Find keyworded photos

Click a preset keyword such as ‘Landscape’to assign it to the selected photo. The assigned keyword appears in the K eyword tags panel. Cli ck Spring’. That word wi ll also appear i n the K eyword tags panel, separated by a comma. You can then manually type more specific words such as ocean.

Toggle open the K eyword List panel. H ere you’ll see a list of all the keywords that have been added to photos in Lightroom’s Catalog. You can also see how many photos contain a particular keyword. Place the cursor on a keyword to highlight the appropriate thumbnails with a white border.

2

Keyword Sets

4

Use keyword suggestions

6

Filter by keywords

In the Library module, double-cli ck to select a landscape photo. To see a photograph’s Info label, press Cmd/Ctrl+I. Toggle open the eywording panel. Cl ick the K eyword Set drop- down menu and choose an appropriate set such as Outdoor Photography.

Press G to go to the Grid view and double click a simi lar photo. You’ll see more keyword suggestions (based on previ ously added keywords) in the K eyword panel. Click appropriate keyword suggestions to add them to the selected photo’s metadata.

If you click the white arrow on the right of a keyword (such as ‘Landscape’) it will summon the Library Filter. The keyword ‘Landscape’will be highlighted in the Library Filter’s K eyword panel and only photos containing that keyword will be visible in the Gri d vi ew. 25

h

Lightr oom

y o




How to put aname to af ace

U se the facial recognition tools in Lightroom’s Library module to detect and organise your portraits and s naps e facialrecogn tion

T of

eature w thin Lightroo

Library m od ule enab es you to organise you ph otos by person, and keep track of am and cl en s.I t w orks by de ect

ages,then alow s you o tag them

nam e.Th e clever part s,as you add gets sm arter,seeki g ou t si

g faces in a group h the p erson’

ore nam es,the feature

ar faces and suggesti g n am es

or yo .S o it takes less ti e than yo 26

y,frien ds

d th

k to tag faces i

a large co ection of organisi g fam

ages.A s such ,it’s a han dy eature for

y p ho os,sn apsh ots,w edd

gs and the l ke.

On ce a face is tagged ,it appears in a l st of so that you can qu ckly fi d hen ever you as w

am ed peo ple,

ages feat ri g that person

ke.T e tag is stored in he im age’s m etadata

h an y o her keyw ord.Yo u can cho ose to d etect aces

thin a si gle f

er or collecti

search yo r enti e catalog e.

,o r alternative y,y u ca


1

Detect the faces

G o to the Library module and select a folder or collection of images in the left-hand panels.H it G for G rid view .In the list of view options at the bottom is a People icon.C lick this to detect faces.Lightroom w ill automatically group very si milar s hots of the same person together (the numb ers in the stack are list ed next to the n ame).

3

Remove bad selections

If t he feature ever goes w rong and d etects somethin g that isn ’t a face,double-click the thumbnail to see the full image,click the face box,then cli ck the X to remove the tag.You can also draw or move face boxes manually u sin g the box tool below the image. D ouble-click again t o go back to the list of f aces.

2

Type a name

D etected faces w ill s how up as ‘unn amed people’.Simp ly type the person ’s n ame in t he space under the im age and they’ll ap pear at t he top as ‘named p eople’.A s you add names , Lightroom w ill d etect simi lar faces and suggest the name for you. If it guesses right,click the tick.If not,add a different name or drag the image to a different named person.

4

Filter the faces

T o s earch you r li brar y for a face,pr ess G for G ri d v iew ,then type the name in the Text section in the filter bar at the top of the screen.You can also fil ter keyw ords by people.G o to the K eyw ord Lists panel to the right of the Library and click the People tab,then click t he arrow next to a person’s name. 27



Tag your images with location data U se and add G P S data embedded in your images to pinpoint the shooting location of a photo in the M ap module

A a L g h t ro o m c a n u s e t h e o w h e r e th r m a t iv e W h e n y o r e c o r d s t h e b a s e d g l o b a s to r e d in h

t e r tr av e g a r o a d t u s e d t o b e t r a d i t a l a c t ic e t o p r i t y o r h o a y s n a p s a n d s to r e t h e m n a n a lb u m o f l c k t h r o u g h . No w , y o u c g a th e r y o u r h o l d a y - s o u r c e d p h o o s t o g e t h e r o l e c t io n (e e c h a p t e r o n e ) . t e r a t iv e l y , y M a p m o d u le to p e s e n t y o u r p h o t o s ac c o rd in e y e re c a p tu r e d , h ic h p o v id e s a fu n a n d w a y t o f i d a r t ic u a r f e s . u a k e a p h o o o n y o u r s a rt p h o n e , h e s o f l o c a t i n f t h e t o s i n g G PS ( e s a t e l l t e l p o s i t io n g s y s te m . e s e c o o a te s a r e a g e f e ’s m e t a d a t a , s o w h e n y o u p o r t

a n i o g

a r -

Find your photos S F e s i re d a lr e a d y s e e t s 28

t t h e C u s t o m t e r t o C a m e r a I c a m e r a t o d s p t - in l GPS f o r m a t i

e r d ro p - d o w n o . O n t h e C a m a y p t o s t a k e s p a y a G PS c o n n t h e M e t a d a

o L g h o o m h e s o a re c a n r e a d t h e m a p c o o r d i a te s a n d d i s p l a y t h e p h o t o ’s l o c a t io n n e M a p o d u l e . He r y o u c a n s e e a a p , s e e l t le f la g s t h a t i d i c a t e a g e o - t a g g e a g e , a n d c l c k t o s e e a n y p h o t o s t h a t e re t ak e n t h e re . o d e m o n s t a te h o w h e M a p p a n e l o r k s , e ’v e p r o v id y o u h s o m e iPo n e - s o u r c e d p h o o s t h a t c o n t a in g e o a g g e d o c a t io n c o o d i n a t e s . M a k e s u e t h a t y o u p o r t h s u p p l e d Po n e - s o u c e d a g e s i o h e L b r a ry o d u l s o y o u c a n o l o w o u r a lk t h r o u g h . f y o u r c a m e r a d o e s n ’ a u t o m a t c a l y g e o - t a g y o u r p h o t o s t e n e ’ l d e m o n s t a t h o w y o u c a n m a n u a l y a d d o c a t o n d a ta to a p h o t o b y d r a g g i g a n d d o p p i g i t o n t o t h e a p p o p r ia t e p a r t o f a m a

d e d e

p .

Tag a location e n u n h e L b r a e r a ta b , c l c k o n y o . P t o s w t h G PS a t a . c k n a p t o t o t a p a n e l

n t h e M a p b a r . f t h e p h e m a p a n d z o o m a p . D a g y o u r i c a t i . G PS c o

m o d u le a c e n a m n w h a g e ’s t h r d i n a t e s

, y p e a p la c e r e t r n s n t h e + b u o u b n a il o n w l a p e a r

e n a m o r e s u n a t o t h e i n t h e

e in t o t s t h e h e b o m a p t t o

t h e n o m o a s ’s m

s e a rc h d i t o n o f h e s ig n e t a d a t a .


3

View by location

C lick the arrow to the right of the G PS coordinates and you’ll jump to that location in the M ap module. T he phot o’s pos it ion w il l b e in di cated by a yell ow fl ag.Place the cursor over a flag to see the tagged photo.U se the arrow keys to cycle through multiple photos.

4

Filter the flags

U se the options in the Location Fil ter to highlight particular photos (such as those tagged w ith G PS coordinates)in the film str ip.A s you move over a thumbnail in t he film strip,the associated flag w ill jump up and dow n on the map.U se M ap Style to change the look of the map. 29



Quick photo fixes U se the Q uick D evelop panel to overcome common problems w ith colour and tone w hile you organise your photos s y o v e a lr e a d y o d u le e n a b le s s o t h a t y u c a n c a n e v e n a u t o m p o r t t h e m o i p r o v e t h p p y Du r i n g p o r t s e c t De v e l o p S t g s d r o p - d o p r e s e ts a n d c h o o s e A u t o T e a c h p o t o g a p s h is to g a

A

s e e n y o u d a t c a e ir c o n n n o n e . m a n

s l o e d

n t h i s o o r g a n p e c i f c y e d t y n t ra s t . h e p n u o L s p r e a d s t

c h a p is e y f i e s o r o d o r t g h se t t a u

t e r, t h e L a r y o u r d g i a l a s s e t m r e e a s i y . Yo u a g e s a s y o o s o , g o t o th e n d o w . S t h e o o m Ge n e r a l l h e n a n a ly s e o m a t ic a l y t o

Adjust the colour balance o r t T YL R 6 s ta r t g i a g e s u f s k in o n e s lo o k t o o o r a p a n e l a n d s e t h e W h i o c r e a t e m o r e n a t u r a l-

t o L g h t ro o fe r s o m a n g e . o g g le e B a la n c e d lo o k i n g s k

w o ro n

s L b r a r m c o p e n t h p - d o w o n e s .

30

e ll a o o u t ro o e m s u c h

s m a k in r o r t o n m Ge n e d t o n e c a s o u r

g m a n u a l a d ju s e p r e s e t s . Go t r a l Pe s e t s . f y o n t ra s t, h i c h o d e l s c h e e k b

’ l

k a t h i s t g r a m

o ’s c o lo u s a n p a n e l n t h e L o r re c t c o lo u s a g t h e p o t o i a n a ls o a p p ly p d o n e s w h ju

d

o n e s b r a r a n d o e s e ts t s t a fe w

Selectively boost the colours

a r y o d e . lo u r c a st , s o e Qu i c k De v n m e n u t o A

O u t h e e lo p u t o

Reveal fine details s w s e c c h o o s e L ig h c re a s e s t n e d e t a i s

c r e a te a h e a lt h i e r s p r e a d o f t o n e s . W e n o r e d e t a il n e n e x t c h a p e r Yo u c a n a l s o m a n u a l y a d j u s t a p h o s i g t h e a p t ly n a m e d Q c k D e v e l o p o d u le . h i s e n a b le s y o u o q c k ly c c re a s e c o n t ra s t t h o u t h a v i g t o d o r e c o m p l e x De v e lo p o d u l e . Yo u c y o u r p h o t o s to t w e a k t h e ir co lo u s a n c l c k s . Re a d o n t o f d o u t h o w

V e a k e r c e n d s to t h e m o

e c o b r a n o o u m a k m o

o u r s lo o k a c e b t to n t o s w t h o u t o e le s s o f a c h o k in g o o o r

l it t e b o o s v e r - s a n g e an g e

d e t t a t to o r

s a t u r h e c o a t s k i n o v e r -

a t e d . Do o u r s. V g s t ro n g t o n e s , s a u r a te

u b b r e r h i d .

l e - c l c k t h e a n c e b o o s t o n e s . t a ls o c h s t o p s

t o q u i c k ly c h a n g e t h e e c i c a s p e c t r a t o ( c m W F e r p re s e ts e s a h g h - k e y m o n o p r b u t to n t o r e s to r e t h e p

c o p o s i t io n h a s � x 7 s u c h a s th e i t . Yo u c a n t o .

Use creative presets t o o h o

e n S v u c h e lp s e s

ts e d o o t o .

y o u c a Pe s e t s e P e m p h

n a ls o a n c h , t h i a s is e

Us e t a n d E p e r i e n t O r a n g e F t e a l a y s c l c k

h e C o p Ra t i o a k e t f t a s p t h L g h t ro o r. s p r o d c t h e Re s e t A l


AFTER

BEFORE

31

Teach yourself Lightroom

32

Teach yourself Lightroom

The Develop module

D iscover how to make basic adjustments to images quickly and easily using the D evelop module

34

In ci g t Develop od ul

36

Discover ow se the st

38

se S art Preview s t edit em ote i age

Y l f i d L g h t r s k e y a g e - e d g t o o ls a n d p h o t o - f x i g p a n e l n t h e De v e lo p o d

am

Us e L g h t ro o s h is to g r am n d o w o q u c k ly a n d e a s i y d ia g n o s e a n d x o n a l p r o b e m n y o r d ig it a l o t o s

42

ake b asic co ad ust en

44

Cr p an d st aigh en your photographs

U s e L g h t ro o s c o l o u r - c o r re c t i o o s to b o o s t w e a k c o o u s w h o t o v e r - s a a t s t o n g o n e s

Us e L g h t ro o s C o s t ra ig h t e n t i t e d h o r iz o n s a n d c o m p o s i o n o f y o u r p h o t o s

o p O v e r la y t o o o v e t

E it i a g e s in t h e L g h t ro o m a t a lo g a t a re n t c u r re n y a c c e s s b le o n y o r c o m p u e r s i g S a r t Pe v i e w

33

h

Lightr oom

y o

T H E D E V ELO P M O D U L E GET THE FILES HERE:


Intr oducingthe Devel op modul e You’ll find Lightroom’s key image-editing tools and photo-fixing panels in the D evelop module t

A

e end of the previou s chapter

be ready to dealw

h m ore com plex i age

on he Library m odu e,w e touch ed

processi g ch alen ges – and this is w

on

soph st cated D evelop

he

ays o i prove ph otos using uick D evelop pan el.Th

aptly n am ed p anel enab es you o q uickl ak som e ofthe m ost om elated issues.O nce yo

on i

ge

ve i po rted an

organ sed yo r col ection of

gi al egatives

nto Co ect on s and add ed keyw ords,yo u’

A ob e inv en ted t e .

ere the

od ule com es in. g ( gitaln egative)

orm at to m ake it eas er to store and access processed raw

es.T e w ord ‘ egat ve’

arks back o the tradition ald ays of an alogu .B efore yo u co

d see a fim

true co ou s and on es,it eeded

egative’ ob

developed n a darkroom ,w hich is w hy he D evelop

od ule’s nam e also evokes

ecol ect on s of tradition ald arkroom echn qu es.H ere y ou can process a p cture’ colou s,ton es and co

po si on o p erfec-

on .Y ou can also m ake select ve adjustm en o y ou r raw

es,so that even

gh -co trast

scenes can feature deta lin he shadow s,m don es and

gh gh s.

At a gl ance The Devel op modul e G et to know the key features of Lightroom’s digital darkroom 4 BASIC 2

1 3

6

The B asic pan elenab les you to tackle the most common p icture pr oblems, such as under-exposed shadow s or colour casts prod uced by a camer a’s incorrect w hite b alance setting.W e’ll look at this impor tant p anelin more detailon the opp osite page.

4

5 SOLO MODE

5

W hen m ultiple pa nels are open,the w orkspace can become cluttered . R ight-click a pan elto summ on this pop-up menu.Hide unw anted panels by un -tickin g their labe ls.Solo M ode enab les you to click a p anelto op en it.It w illthen close allthe o the r p an els that are open.

6 PRESETS

34

1 NAVIGATOR

2 HISTOGRAM

3 TOOLBAR

Thi s pan elenab les you to get a closer look at your pict ure .Click on a size at the top to zoom in b y a specific magn ification .

This p aneldisplays the spread of tones in a photo.Here w e see some strong shadow s on the left,and an absen ce ofstrong br ight highlights.

Th ese dar kroom -style tools e nab le you to improve your photos w ith a few clicks.You can crop images,rem ove sensor spots,or make tonaledits.

These p resets enable you to make man y adjustm ents w ith a sin gle click. They chan ge a multitude ofsettings in D evelop m odu le pan els to pro du ce a range ofcreative or photo-fixing edits. C heck out chapter seven for more on this pow erfulpanel.

Teach yourself Lightroom THE DEVELOP MODULE

A t a glance The B asic panel Familiarise yourself with the Basic panel’s key features

1

2

3

4 5

6

1 WHITE BALANCE

4 SHADOWS

This section enables you to try out different white balance presets (Such as Flash or Daylight), or manually change the colour tempe rature. Here we’ve dragged the Temperature slider down to 5570 to cool down the starting i mage’s rather warm colour cast.

This slider enables you to lighten under-exposed shadows and reveal more detail. It doesn’t affect the brighter highlights and white pixels towards the right of the histogram window. It also leaves the photo’s darkest black pixels untouched at t he far left of the graph.

2 EXPOSURE

5 CLARITY

Our starting image is under-exposed and lacks detail. By dragging Exposure to +1.20 we can open up the aperture to reveal more detail. This adjustment b rightens the photo’s tones and causes the histogram graph to shift to the right.

This clever slider increases midtone contrast, which is a great way to make fine detai ls such as our subject’s hair stand out. It does a similar job to the sharpening tools in the Detail panel. e’ll look at Clarity in more detail in the next chapter.

3 HIGHLIGHTS

6 VIBRANCE

The global adjustment made by the Exposure slider has caused the brightest pixels to over-expose. W e can selectively claw back detail in the brightest highlights by dragging this slider left to -38. This adjustment doesn’t alter the d arker tones.

This slider enables you to selectively adjust saturation. It can boost the strength of weaker colours without over-saturating stronger ones. Here we’ve reduced the strength of the vi vid orange jumper without desaturating the skin tones too much.

35

Teach your sel fLightroom T H E D E V ELO P M O D U L E GET THE FILES HERE:


The histogram U se Lightroom’s histogram w indow to diagnose and fix tonal problems in your digital photos h e h s to g ra m o o s in t h e De v p e r fo r m s a s i c l e d t o a h s s e c a n u s e a c h a r t o , e c a n lo o k a t th e if h e i m a g e is u n d e r c a n a ls o u s e L g h t ro o a t e a n i a g e t h a t h a s

T o r n p a t ie n o s e e W e s c re

n d o w s o n e o f th e m o s t u s e fu l e lo p o d e . h e h s to g r a m g ra p h a r f c t o n o t h e e d i ca l c h a r t p t a l a t i e n t ’s b e . J s t a s a d c t o r h e lp d i a g n o s e t h e h e a l h o f a s h a p e o f a p h o t o ’s h i s t o g r a m g r a p h - o r o v e r - e x p o s e d s h is to g ra m n d o w o h e l a h e a lt h ie r s p r e a d o f o n e s t h a t

Analyse the histogram h e g o f th e c o n s is ts m (n t h e r ig e ft d e o n

r ap h s h is to g o s t ly o h t ). s t a te s

b u n c h e d u p o w a rd s t h e m r am n d o w . h i s in d c a te f d t o n e s (n t h e m d d e ) e f a c t t h a t t h e r e ’s n o g r a p h t e p h o t o ’s la c k o f s h a d o w

36

t s s h a d o s , d t o n e s a n d h g h g h t s lo w e ’ l s h o w y o u h o w o a n a ly s e u c a n u n d e r s a n d h o w p a r ts o f h e t e t o a p o t o ’ s t o n a l c h a r a c t e r s t ic s . a rt i g i a g e lo o k s o v e r - e x p o s e d t o t h e y o u h o w o u s e t e h is to g r a m o c r e a o t o . o g e t s ta r te d , s t i p o r t d o w o a d e s i o L g h t ro o m a n o d e …

Darken the midtones d d e s th a t a n d h a t a s .

a n d r ig h t th e a g e i g h l g h o n t h e f a r

Show the clipping warnings D o p S a d o w s to - 7 . A p h o to s h o p i x e ls , s o r a g B a c k s le f t to - 6 . S a d o w p p n g c o n o s e e t h e b a c k e s t o f b l e . e s e c l p p e d a r e a s w l r i t a s t h e r e ’s n o c r u c i a l e t a il b e g l o s t in t h e s

s p l a y s m o r e d e t a il n n t h e w a lk t h ro u g h b e a h is to g r am s o th a t y o a t i g g r a p h e q a O u r T YL R g s t a k e d e y e . W e ’ l s h o w a c o r r e c t ly e x p o s e d YL R g f o m t h e o p e n i t n t h e De v e lo p

u d h c k s h a d p u r e e s m

a v e t h e o s b la c a ll s

so m e b la c k S o a s p a tc h e s k , b u e c t io n s .

A

e l - e x p o o m t h e b a a r r i g h t . Pa c e t h e E p s u r e s l e r w e d u c e E p o s u e t o

s e d c k s c u r l b e -

p h o o s h o u ld h a v o n t h e f a r le f t to t s o r o v e r t h e e a k s g h g h t e d . D a g 6 . h i s d a r k e n s

e a g ra p h h e h i te i n t h e m e f t o n t t h e m d t

h a t s p re a d s s o n t h e d l e . h e g r a p h t o o n e s .

Improve the contrast F r a s t ro n g r n o n S o � �. A e w e d p a tc p d e t a il n t h e b r ig o r t a n t d e t a il t o

w

c o n t ra s H g h h e s w h t e s t lo s e n

t

e n e e d s g h t C p p l a p p e a r h g h g h t s , t h e s e a r e a s

o m e w h i te g . D a g W e n y o u b e g t a g a i , t h .

h ig h g h s . h i te s t o in t o b lo w e r e ’s n


AFTER

BEFORE

37

h

Lightr oom

y o



Use Smar t Pr eviews Edit images in the C atalog that aren’t currently accessible by Lightroom using Smart P review s s w e revealed n chapter one,Lightroom can gather

A

ph otograph s f om a variety o

ocation s (such

rive con tai

er you discon ect the exter alh ar

g the o rigi al aw

e,you can st

as external ard d rives)

o its Catalog .I t then

allo the ph oto-f xi g too s in he D evelop

creates and stores stan da

-resol tion

Sm art Preview version o

eview

yo ur laptop w th the ex ernal hard drive,L gh

the origi alh gh -resol

autom at caly loo k at allthe ed

on

ages on y ou r exter alh ar

aptop or PC.Ho

ever,i yo u p an to u se a laptop to ed t yo ur

ph otos w hi e aw ay f om

he o

ce,then you

on t

ant t

ave to l g aroun d a col ection of hard d rives in order t access and edit yo r

ages.

he m ove,w

s you

oo m

ade to the S

art

o the high-resolution origi al

he folow ng w alkthrou gh w e’lw ork w

h an over-

exp osed start g i age that’s been i po rted an d stored on an ex ernal hard drive.A

er dow nloading ou r TY LR� �.dn

start g i age,cop y it onto an exter ald rive too,so y ou can

y creat ng a Sm art P eview of a ph oto,you can ed t the age w hi e on

Preview ,an d he n app y the m In

ap

od ule to the

he ph oto.W hen yo u reconn ect

of each i po rted p oto on yo ur PC’s hard d rive,w hile stori drives.T his en ables yo u o save valuab e d sc space o n yo

38

exter alh ard d rive.A

ho ut requ ring access to the

discover ho w Sm art Preview s w ork their m agic to give you he

eedo m

o ed t any ph oto at any

e and n any place


Smart preview

39

Teach yourself THE DEVELOP MODULE

1

Import a photo

G o to File>Import Photos and V ideo.Brow se to the external drive in the Source section of the import w indow and select the T Y LR � �.dn g thum bn ail.C li ck t he A dd butt on so t hat L ightroom ’s C atalog w ill lin k to the photo w ithout moving it onto your PC . Leave the Bui ld Sm art Preview s box un-ti cked at this stage,because you can alw ays choose this opti on for specif ic photographs at a later date.Cl ick Import .

3

Build the Smart Preview

C lick the Build Smart Preview button.A fter a short w hile a new dialog w ill appear ind icating that ‘O ne Smart P review w as built’. C lick O K to dismiss the w indow.Look below the histogram w indow. A new label w ill in dicate that you now have the original file plus a Smart Preview version.A s an experiment,eject the external hard drive by disconnecting it from your PC .N ow only the Smart Preview label w ill be visible below the histogram.

40

2

Standard versus Smart

By default Lightroom w ill create a standard preview of any imported photo so that you can see it i n t he Library module. T he or igin al hi gh-resolut ion raw fi le w il l remain on the ext ern al d ri ve. H ow ever,if the external hard d rive isn’t connected then you w on’t be able to edit a standard pr eview version of an im age.G o to the histogram w indow and click the O riginal Photo box.A Smart Preview dialog w ill appear.

4

Dismiss the warning

If you click t he Smart Preview label below the histogram graph, a new dialog w ill appear indicating that the photo is mis sing or offline,but it can still be edited using its Smart Preview.C lick O K to dismis s the w arning.A ny other standard preview photos in the Library that w ere on the external dr ive w ill feature an ‘!’(photo mis sin g) symbol.If the external drive is still disconnected,then our T Y LR ��. dng thumbnail w ill have a Smart Preview icon on it.


5

Analyse the histogram

T ake the p hoto i nt o t he D evelop m odul e.You can see f rom the spread of tones on the histogram graph that there are lots of strong midtones in t he middle and a few highlights tow ards the right, but there’s very littl e shadow information on the left.T his in dicates that the photo is slightly over-exposed.W e need to increase the stren gth and s pread of the histogram graph tow ards the left t o create stronger shadow s.

7


T o tease out some of t he textu re i n the r ocky mi dton es,drag C larity r ight to +��.T his slightly increases the spread of the foam’s cli pped highlights,but detail in these areas is n egligible.By boosting V ibrance to +�� you can selectively increase the saturation of natural-lookin g colours such as the blue sky and green seaw eed. W armer colours tend n ot to be altered as much because this is designed to stop any skin tones from becoming too orange.

6

Improve the contrast

8

Reconnect the drive

T o i mpr ove the p hoto’s cont rast and create a w id er spr ead of tones,drag the Expos ure slid er left to -�.�� to gently d arken the photo overall.D rag the Blacks sli der left to -��.T his makes the histogram stretch to the far left,s o w e now have some dark black pixels present i n t he picture.For some contrasting w hite highlights, drag W hites right to +��.T his adds a hint of clip ping to some of the foam,but no crucial detail is lost.

O nce you’ve finished editi ng your Smart Preview ,reconnect your external hard drive.A ny ‘photo missin g’warn ing icons by other thumbnails w ill di sappear.If you look below our T Y LR ��.dng photo’s histogram w indow you’ll see that the ‘O riginal+Smart Preview ’ label has reappeared.A ll the colour and tonal changes that w e made to the Smart Preview w ill be applied to the original raw version of the photo on the external drive. 41

h

BEFORE

Lightr oom

y o



AFTER

Make basiccol our adj ustments U se Lightroom’s colour-correcting tools to boost w eak colours w ithout over-saturating strong ones you plan o share yo ur edi ed ph otograph s on ne

I

hen yo u d on’t need to w orry as m uch abou over-saturat g the co ou s.Com pu er screen can reprodu ce m

on s of colou s,bu t i yo u’

es loo king w

oo k at colou r correction n chap er,bu t it w

te balan ce sett g fais to get

te in particu ar lgh ti g scen arios. lb e h elpful o get to grips

th L gh troo

colou r-correcti g too s as soo n as po ssible becau se yo

careful abo t avo

need to use them of en.

g ov er-sat ated co ou s at the ed ti

you can see on a m on

or.If you print over-satura ed colou s,

they m ay loo k garish an d ack d eta lin the p ri t version e’lloo k

o

ays to get m ore faithf -loo king pri s i

chap er nine, bu t t’s w orth b ei g aw are of the con cept of ri table an d Ligh troo m

ri table co ou rs at an early stage. s also d esign ed o h elp y ou cou

eract colou

cas s.Th ese w arm orange o r cold b ue tints can o ccur w hen

Every edit

e’

ore detailin the fol ow

plann ng to print you r photos then you need o be m ore stage,becau se pri ers can’t reprod ce as m any colou s as

42

yo r cam era’s autom atic w

at you perform

n Ligh troo

s Develop

od ule is stored in he H story p anel.T his en ables you perform or yo u can

ul ple u nd oes i you need o ret ace you r s eps, p straigh t to a part cu ar stage in the ed ti

ocess by cl cking the ap prop riate history state.Y ou can also record v ersion s of yo r edi ed

age as easi y accessible

Sn apsho s,w hich gives you the f eedom fferen t l

ks.

o experi ent w


1

Adjust the saturation

O pen T Y LR ��.dng in Lightroom’s D evelop module.T he photo looks a little desaturated,apart from the bright orange lichen on t he rock.G o to the Presence section of t he Basic panel.If you decrease the value of the Saturation slider to -�� then all the colours b ecome greyscale.

3


5

Adjust the white balance

If you increase Saturation,the lichen becomes too saturated and unprintable.To selectively boost the greens and blues w ithout over-saturating the stron ger oranges,drag the V ibrance sli der ri ght to a value of + 7�. T his gives th e bl ue ocean and the green moss more imp act.

T he ‘V ibr ance A djust ment ’Snap shot w il l appear in the Snaps hots p anel.T o enhance the ocean’s bl ues,drag the Temperature slider to ��6 6.T his makes the green sea look more blue.C ounteract the green tint by d ragging T in t to +��.C reate a new Snaps hot called ‘W hite Balance’.

2

Adjust the Vibrance

Restore Saturation to � .Reduce V ibrance to -�� .T he w eaker colours become grey,w hile the st ronger orange lichen retains some colour.T his demonstrates how the V ibrance sli der selectively adjusts colour s aturation.It also has a stronger influence over typical landscape colours.

4

Create a Snapshot

6

Compare the versions

Before m aking fur ther colour adjustmen ts,let’s record this version as a Snapshot.G o to the Snapshots panel on the left of the D evelop module’s w orkspace.C lick on the + icon t o create a new Sn apshot.It names the Snaps hot usin g date and tim e.Re-label it ‘V ibrance adjustmen t’.C lick C reate.

You can now click the Snaps hot labels to toggle betw een the tw o versions of the photo.T he Vi brance A djustment Sn apshot has a greener hue than the W hite Balance version.You can create as many Snapshots as you like to help you decide w hich edited version y ou prefer. 43

h

Lightr oom

y o



Cr op & str aighten yourphotogr aphs U se Lightroom’s C rop O verlay tool to straighten tilted horizons and improve the composition of your photos

W

hile loo ki g at a scene throu gh yo ur cam era’

ph oto into Lightroo

view

can rem ove d st act g ob ects w th ease,st aigh en

co

nd er,you can zoom and pan the lens t pose he photo.You m y know

akes

a good com posi on,or you m ght em ploy a m or

ntui ve po

t-and- sho ot ap proach. Often ,it’s o

oo ki g at ph otos on Ligh troo

hat y

he

s Library) that yo u can spo t a ph oto that stand aking he picture you

ob ect at the edge o

he

po rt ai -orien ed on e.Du e to the h gh esol

ce a dist act ng

ght be st aying into the p ho o.A nd you problem s such as ti ed h orizon s un

ay no t no

ce

ly ou ve i po rted a

oa

on prod uced

ore prom

en t in he

am e an d st

produ ce large p rints f om a crop ped ph oto.Crop ping aw s also

on -destr ct ve,so yo u can al ays

estore the crop ped ph oto’s origi alco

am e.For exam ple,w hen di ect ng

od elin he stud o you lb e m ore at entive to her po se than

on ky

by DS LR cam eras you can use the Crop O ver ay to m ake

es in Ligh troo m ay n ot no

con cen trati g on any bits of backd op or l gh ti g kit that

44

orizon s and even turn a land scape-o rien ed p ho o i

certain eatures loo k

e cam era’s LCD display (or even

ou t as being w el-com po sed. hen

.T han ks to the Crop Overlay too lyo

po sition

y activati g the Crop oo s ran ge o overlays you can ecom po se you r ph otograph s so hat their contents adh ere to som e of he class c rules of com po si on by

aster artists for cen

han dy overlays in

hat have been u sed

ries.W e’ take a loo k at t ose

ore detailin ou r w alkthrou gh.


AFTER

45


1

Use a preset crop

Import our T Y LR ��.dng start in g image into Li ghtroom’s Li brary. In Q uick D evelop you can access and apply preset crops by clicking the C rop Ratio drop-dow n menu.Some of these presets (suc h as �x7)s ubt ly chan ge the photo’s shape (aspect rat io).O thers (suc h as �x�),make a mor e dramat ic change (by maki ng a sq uare image).A square crop doesn’t sui t thi s part icular image,so revert back to the A s shot option.

3

Create a landscape crop

T o keep the cr opp ed p hoto’s shape the s ame as the or igin al,ti ck the padlock icon to make sure that it ’s in a locked positi on.D rag the top-left corner handle of the C rop Frame tool dow n to the right to remove the lamp on the left-hand sid e of the frame.D rag ins ide the overlay to repos iti on i t so t hat w e can s ee more of the model’s head. T his creates a ti ght lan dscap e-shaped crop that has t he sam e aspect ratio as the original.C lick D one. 46

2

Choose an overlay

For more control over the crop,take the photo into t he D evelop module.C lick the C rop O verlay icon on the left of the tool panel.You can summon dif ferent overlays to help you crop subjects. G o to T ools>C rop G uide O verlay and explore the options.Thirds summon s a rule-of-third s grid t hat helps you to place objects in a balanced composition.G rid i s especially handy w hen looking for unw anted tilted horizons.

4

Create a portrait crop

O ur p hoto’s su bject doesn’t su it a lands cape-shaped crop, how ever,so click the C rop O verlay icon to reveal the C rop Frame tool’s overlay.D rag the top-left handle up to the ri ght,and the overlay w ill change its land scape shape to a port rait-ori ented one.D rag the corner handles to create a tighter crop.She now looks tow ards the space on the right of the frame.T he unbalanced distracti ons on the left are hidden.C lick D one.


5

Keep the shapes consistent

Because w e kept the padlock icon ti cked,the cropped photo sti ll has the same aspect ratio (or shape)as other por trait-or iented photos produced by t he same camera,even though it st arted out w ith a landscape orientation.T his means that the photo w ill look consistent w hen displayed w ith un-cropped portrait photos captured duri ng the same shoot,so you can create a series of prints or an onlin e gallery w ith pictures that all have the same shape.

7

Create different compositions

C lick the C rop O verlay icon.Click the A s shot drop-dow n menu next to the padlock and choose a preset size such as �x�. T his gives you the s quare overlay w e saw in step one,but thi s ti me you can drag inside the overlay to position the face in the square shape.C lick D one.C reate a new Snaps hot called ‘Square shape’. You can then toggle betw een the cropped version s to see w hich composition you prefer.

6

Create a crop Snapshot

8

Straighten an image

O n the previous spread w e recorded different colour treatments of the same image as handy Sn apshots so that w e could experiment w ith di fferent looks,using the Snapshots to compare them.You can store different cropped versions as Snapshots too. G o to the Snapshots panel and click the + icon.Label the new Snapshot ‘Portrait version’and cli ck C reate.A new ‘Portrait version’ Snapshot label w ill appear in the Snapshots panel.

Import T Y LR ��.dng and take it in to the D evelop module. C lick the Crop O verlay icon.Choose Tools>C rop G uide O verlay>G rid.You can easily see that the horizon is ti lting dow n to the right.Cli ck the Straighten tool icon.D raw a line that follow s the tilted horizon.T he tool w ill automatically rotate the overlay to counteract the tilt.You can fin e-tune it by dragging the A ngle slider, if n ecessary.Click D one to make the crop. 47

Teach yourself Lightroom PHOTO-FIXING TOOLS

48

T

h yo

L PHOTO-FIX ING TOOLS

P Improve your images quickly and easily using the sophisticated tools in the Develop module

50

Tackle high-contrast monochrome scenes

54

Remove distortion caused by your lens

56

Get a better perspective in your images

T w eak the tones ofa monochrome image to revealdetaili n t he shadow s,mid tones and hi ghlights

Set up and ap ply lens pr ofiles in Li ghtroom to automati cally count eract lensindu ced distortion

58

Reveal more midtone detail and texture

62

Remove unwanted colour casts

Revealmore texture and detailby selectively i ncreasing mi dton e contr ast u sing th e C lari ty slid er

C ounteract w arm or cooltints produ ced by an in correct w hit e balance using the D evelop m odu le

St raighten converging vert icals caused by perspectivaldi storti on usin g Lightroom’s pow erful Len s profile correcti ons

49

h

Lightr oom

y o

PH O TO -FIXIN G TO O LS GET THE FILES HERE:


Tackl e high-contr ast monochr ome scenes Tw eak the tones of a monochrome image to reveal detail in the shadow s,midtones and highlights en y ou r cam era is faced w th a high -con trast

W

scen e (such as a back -l t subject),it ocation to cap

ay m eter the

re detai n the b righ est areas.I

ou r s art g i age here the cam era has captured

etai n the su -l t backg ou

,b t as a resu t our back-

s cl pp

g w arni gs to discover w hich areas ar

un der- or over-exposed,and dem on st ate how etailw

ere it’s realy

On ce you’ve dow nloaded and age into L gh troo

o reveal

eed ed po rted ou r star ng

s Catalog ,you lsee that it’

sub ect has b een plun ged into si ho uette.T he cam era do esn’

al eady been conver ed to m onochrom e.W e rem oved

un ders and hat w e’ e m ore interested in seeing he hu

the d stracti g co ou r i orm ation by cl cking th

an

as c panels Black &

gu e than he back grou d bu dings. Fortun ately,Ligh troo

s digi ald arkroom – the Develop

od ule – has allthe tools w e need o take control over the ph oto’s shad ow s an d highl gh s,and ortant w alkthrough

eveald etailw he e i

hi e tab.How ever,our m on

convers on need s som e select ve ton aladjustm ents o m ake e girls m dton e d etai s stand ou t f om Lightroo

e shad ow s.

s ton e-t eaking ools are p ow er ul eno ugh

e hidi g d stracti g ob ects.In the follow

enable us to l ghten u p the m od els un der-exp osed sh adow

e’lshow you how

and darken the w nd ow s blow n-o ut highl ghts,so that you

o arget and darken he

surrou nd ng shadow s to h elp he m od els m dtone figure

can see both he m odelan d he b ackgrou nd bui ding.W e’

stand ou t,w hile t eaki g the h gh gh s i dep en den

take the creative d ecision of

y to

ose the d st act ng back grou d bu di gs.W e’ lalso use 50

Ligh troo

el be ately b ow

backgrou nd s highl ghts so that w e can focus on

go tt he

od el


BEFORE

51

Teach yourself PHOTO-FIXING TOOLS

1

Boost the exposure

D ow nload and import our T Y LR ��.dng monochrome starting image in to Lightroom,click t he photo’s thumb nail and take it into t he D evelop module.W e’ll begin by making a universal tonal adjustmen t to reveal more shadow and mi dtone detail t hroughout the photo.In the B asic panel,drag the Exposure sli der to +�.�� .T his opens up the aperture by nearly tw o stops,and reveals more shadow and mid tone detail.T he highlights are over-exposed.

3

Spot the clipped shadows

T he dar kest (cli pp ed)areas w il l pr in t out as p ure b lack w it h no detail.To see w hich areas are clipped,click the triangular Show Shadow C lippi ng icon at the top left of the histogram w indow . Blue shadow clippin g w arning patches w ill appear.To darken more shadow s in other parts of the photo,drag the Shadow s sli der left to -�8.This darkens the shadow s around the model,w hile her midtones remain un clipped.

52

2

Darken the blacks

A good monochrome conversion should have some black shadow s and w hite highlights to create good contrast.The histogram graph lacks strong dark shadow information on the far left. T o create s ome bl ack s hadow s,d rag the B lacks sli der left to -7� .T he shadow s in the histogram graph w ill sli de to the left.O ur photo now has some darker shadow s,but w e can stil l see the girl ’s midt one details that w ere revealed by the Exposu re slider.

4

Spot the clipped highlights

C lick the triangular Shadow C lippin g icon to hide the blue patches.click the Show H ighlight C lippin g icon at the top right of the histogram.The blow n-out w hites in the w indow w ill appear as patches of red.These clipped areas w ill pr int out as pure w hite.If you drag the H ighlights slider l eft to -6� you can remove the red highlight clippi ng w arni ngs and reveal much more detail in the sun-lit background.


5

Blow out the highlights

A s w e demonstrated in the previous step,it’s possi ble to restore blow n-out highlight detail w ithout altering our photo’s carefully edited midtones and shadow s.H ow ever,the new ly restored background buildin gs are a bit di stracting,so w e can deliberately clip them to make the model the main point of interest.D rag the H ighlights slider ri ght to +�� to over-expose the unw anted background details.T urn off the H ighlight Clippin g w arning.

7

Increase Clarity

T o br in g out more m id ton e detai l i n the con tour s of the m odel, you can increase the midtone contrast w ithout altering the scene’s br ightest highlights or d arkest shadow s.T o make this selective tonal adjustment ,go to the Presence section of t he Basic panel.D rag the C larity s lider r ight to + ��.T his mid tone contrast adjustment gives the model’s mid tones a bit m ore punch,and helps t o emphasise her shape and form.

6

Improve the contrast

8

Compare before and after versions

By deliberately blow ing out the highlights w e have a simplerlookin g photo in w hich the girl ’s midt one contours stand out in contrast against the w indow ’s clean w hite background shapes. T he cl ip ped shadow s al so hid e di st racti ng or un imp ort ant areas i n the room,and help to emphasi se the shape and for m of t he girl ’s midt ones.H ere w e’ve used clippi ng in a creative w ay to create a striking high-contrast monochrome scene.

T o s ee how your edit ed p hoto com pares w it h t he ori ginal, click the before and after icon at the bottom left of the w orkspace.G o to the N avigator and click Fill.In t he before version of the photo the model is lost in the shadow s,and w e’re distracted by the background bui ldi ngs.In the after version t he model stands out much more clearly and the buildings are hidden,thanks to the selective contrast changes. 53

h

Lightr oom

y o

BEFORE



AFTER

Remove l ens distor tion S et up and apply lens profiles in Lightroom to automatically counteract lens-induced distortion hat you see w

W

h he naked eye isn’t a

shoo

ng

h a w de-an gle lens,the edges o

am e can b ecom e distorted,w

verticalli es ap eari g cu rved ou

ays w hat

you get n a ph oto of he sam e locat on .W hen

ard) or pin-cu sh on

oticeab e w

he

h h orizon aland

stead of st aigh t.Th s barrel

ard) distortion s especial

en oo king at arch ecturalp otos that feat

am e can b ecom e darker at he ed ges and corners.Yo u’ also n otice darker edge colou s and on es w hen using a w der apert

e.T

s v gn ett g e

ect occu s b ecau se d

erent

am ou nts ofl ght are enter ng he ed ge of he lens com pared o the cen

e,causing he co rners of he i

age to b ecom

correct y exp osed

Ch eap er len ses can also add colour-related artefacts t h a h gh-con

a w hite sw an agai st a dark b

ast edge (such as

e lake),yo u

ay f d ri ges

Fortun ately,Ligh

oo

s L en s Co rrect on s p ane lh as al

e too s yo u ne ed to co un eract vign et

g,b arrelan d pi

cush on distort on an d chrom at c ab errat on .T ank s to

of pu rple cl gi g to t e ed ges of yo r s bject.T his ug

col ection of Le s P ofies,L gh troo m can co

eract these

an d

problem s autom at caly,so that your ph otos w

lloo k

stracti g ch om atic aberration s cau sed by the len s’

abil y to focus dif erent w avelen gths o 54

era’s sensor.Also,w hen you zoom out

h you r lens to capture a w der view of a land scape,the

ts of straigh t l es. a sub ect.W hen aced w

spot on your ca

gh t on o the sam

ke the scene d d w hen you saw

t

h the n aked eye.

ore


2

Read the metadata

Br in g T Y LR �6.dng into Lightroom’s Libr ary.To see if lines are distorted it can be handy to summon a grid. G o to View >Loupe O verlay and click G rid.H old dow n C md/ C trl and click and drag on the Size and O pacity options to customise your grid to suit the photo.

T oggle op en t he M etadata panel .H ere w e can see t hat a ��-��mm f /�.� lens w as used to capture the photo. T he focal len gth w as � �mm .T he camera w as a N ikon D 7� � . Lightroom can use this information to w ork out w here the dis tort ions w ill occur (and therefore counteract them).

1

3

Set up a lens profile

4

Compare versions

5

Remove the vignette

6

Remove the fringes

Add a grid

C lick the D evelop module at the top.Toggle open Lens C orrections.You could go to M anual and drag the sliders to counteract distorted lines.For quicker,more precise corrections cli ck Profile.T ick Enable Profile C orrections.In Lens Profile,click M ake and choose N ikon.

You can fine-tune the results achieved by dragging the D istortion slider,although the profile should do a good job.Toggle the correcti on on and off and you’ll als o noti ce that the original corners are slightly dark.T he profile lightens them to match the rest of the scene.

T he Len s P rofi le com mand reads the p hoto’s m etadata and then automatically selects the appropriate lens from L ightroom’s li st of l ens prof iles.T oggle the Enable Profile C orrections box on and off to see how the profile counteracts the original photo’s dis torted li nes.

If you go to the C olor tab you can tur n on R emove C hromatic A berration.T his option counteracts any colour fr in ging around high-contrast objects w ith a click.You can fine-tune the results by using the eyedropper to sample unw anted frin ge colours,then adjust the A mount sli der. 55

Teach your sel fLightroom PH O TO -FIXIN G TO O LS GET THE FILES HERE:


Get a better perspective Straighten converging verticals caused by perspectival distortion using Lightroom’s pow erful Lens profile corrections s t b u g s h a v e v e r t ic a l a l s a t a � � - d e g r e e a n g e f o m e g r o u n d . Ho w e v e r , n p h o t o g r a p h t h e w a l s o f te n a p p e a r w d e r a p a r t a t t e g r o u d , b u t t t in w a r d s o w a r d s t h e t o p . e s e c o n v e r g i e r t c a l l e s a r e c r e a t e d b y e r s p e c t iv a l d i s t r t o n t i g y o r ca m e r a o g e t t h e t o p o f t e b u g i t o t h o t o w h e n s h o o t in g u p c lo s e c re a s e s t h is d s to r t o n , a s o e s u s i n g a w e - a n g le le n s to f it t h e s i e s i t o t e f a m e . o a v o i d t h e s e c o n v e r g i g v e r t c a l e s , y o u c o u d t r h o o t i g y o r s u b je c t f o m a m o r e d is ta n t (r h ig h e r) v a n a g e o n t , s o y o u n o lo n g e r n e e d o t i t t h e c a m e ra u p a rd s . l e l p t h e s u b j e c t ’s w a l s r u n a ra l e l t h t h e e d g e o f t ra m e . t e r n a t iv e y , y o u c o d u y a s p e c i a l s t t t - s h t le n h a t c o u e r a c ts t e c o n v e r g i g v e r t ic a ls a s y o u s h o o t . s y o u ’ l d i s c o v e r in o u r w a lk t h r o u g h , L g h t ro o m p r o v i d e s e v e a l a y s t o s t r a i g h t e n o t c o n v e r g i g v e r t ic a l s in t s i g i a l d a r k r o o m . e L e n s C o r r e c t io n p a n e l e n a b l e s y o u a n a l y o r a u t o m a t ic a l y c o t e ra c t p e r s p e c t iv a l s t o r t io n n d a k e w a l s r u n p a r a l e l h t h e e d g e s o f th e a m e . o r e r e c e n t v e r s io n s o f L g h o o m y o u c a n a d j s t th e p a r a l a x f fe c t v i a t e T a n s f o r m p a e l n t h e De v e l o p o d e . Yo u a n c l c k a n d a g o n t h e i a g e t o d c t a te p a r t c u a r u p r ig h t s c h s v e r y h e lp f u l o r a q c k e t .

M

v p

s p f t s d a e c

Crop the edges S a ig h e n r ig h t a s f y o u r e s h o o t i 1 0 % d e r th a n y o u c a n s ta r t to 56

y o p o g y m

r i a g e f i s t s s i b l e . Yo u f ir s t to a n o u n o r m a l y w a k e m a n u a l a d

BEFORE

Make a manual correction b y c r l o s e a t e o u d ju s t

o p p t t o e

p a r t e p c o n ts

g in o f y a r a l u n e .

o

a k e i t a s o u r i a g e , s o a x e f fe c t s h o o r a c t h i s . No w

a k e o p e n Dr a g Ve r t i c a r a l e l t c ro p p i n g y o

B t h e a l to h t h e l

d i n g . Le n s - 65t f ra m o s e d

p g o t h e De C o r r e c t io n s p a o m a k e t h e v e r e e d g e s . f y o u e t a il a t t h e t o p

v e lo p n e l a n d t ic a l l d o t h s a n d b o

o d c l e s s t t to

u l c k r u e p m

e. M n b e o f

o g g l a n u a l r e o r e t h e th e a m e .

T

h yo

L PHOTO-FIX ING TOOLS

AFTER

3

Make a profile

C lick t he Len s Co r recti ons panel’s Profile tab,then tick Enable Profile C orrections.Set M ake to N ikon. T his count eracts vignett in g,subt le barr elor pin -cushion distor ti ons and can help to fix p erspectivaldi storti on.A djust the amount ofD istorti on and V ignetting using the sliders.

4

Automatic correction

If you can’t get i t r ight manu ally,go to the L ens C orrection panel’s Basic tab.Ti ck C onstrain C rop t o avoid w hit e edges around the edge ofyou r frame.T ick the U pr ight secti on’s A uto bu tton to automati cally counteract ti lted hor izons and convergin g vert icals. 57

h

Lightr oom

y o



Revealmor e midtone detail R eveal more texture and detail by selectively increasing midtone contrast using the C larity slider t the start of this chap ter

A

e tackled a high-

contrast scene that had both over- and underexposed areas.W e u sed he D evelop asic pan elto ind epen den

odu e’

y adjust the shadow

and the h gh gh s to reveald eta lw here it w as desi ed .T he start g i age on backgrou nd

s page h as som e brigh t a eas in the

nd ow s,but the m ajori y of he p ho o con sist

of du lshad ow s and press h as lots of ocessed

urky m dtones.T he flat-l t pr nting

erest g textures an d

cture t ese areas of

etais,b t in the

terest are lost in

uddy w ash ofd ullbrow n m dtones To evealm ore detailin his scene w e cou d have captured ore on ali Ho

orm at on n a ser es of bracketed exp osu es.

ever,L gh troo m

acks Pho osh op CC’s abi y to m erge

ul ple ph otos as a s

gle HD R (high dy am c ran ge)

com po si e that features detailin he shadow s,m dtones an highl ghts.W e cou d also h ave zapped he scene w of

ash,b t

un gsten and

e chose to use t e avai able

h a bu st

x o art

aturald ayl gh t i stead becau se i

cial

od uci

a thi d l ght source w ou d m ake the i age unw orkable. Fortun ately,o r starti g i age is a raw fie,so t already contains m ore ton alinform at on han

e can see w hen

oo king at he un processed vers on of he ph oto.In he alkthrou gh o ver eafw e’lsho w you how

o l ghten the

on es and i crease their con trast o m ake fi er features and

extures stand ou t

how

ore ef ect vely.W e’lalso sho w yo

o revealthe scene’s t ue colou s by cool ng dow n

arm colou r cast and em oving a slght m agenta t nt caused by an 58

correct

e balance sett g.

BEFORE


AFTER

59


1

Examine the histogram

Import T Y LR ��.dng into L ightroom and take the unprocessed photo int o the D evelop modul e.From the spread of the hist ogram graph w e can see that the photo has inf ormation throughout the enti re tonal range.H ow ever,from the height of the graph w e can see that the strongest tones are the shadow s,follow ed by w eaker mid tones.W e’ll need to move (or remap)some of that shadow information into the midt one section to reveal missin g detail.

3

Increase the exposure

It’s alw ays a good plan t o fix colour-related problems f irst , because this can change the tones in the image.T his i s w hy the w hite balance contr ols are at the top of the Basic panel.T o reveal more detail,ki ck off by dr agging the Exposur e sli der r ight to + �.��. T he his togram graph w il l sl id e to the r ight,becaus e som e of the shadow s become midtones.W e can now see a healthier-looking histogram and more detail i n t he printi ng press. 60

2

Correct the colours

D rag the T emperature slider l eft to a value of ��8 to remove the photo’s w arm colour cast.T o remove the hint of magenta, drag the Ti nt slider dow n from +�� to +��.T his restores the metal pri nti ng press’s greenish metalli c hue and makes it look less brow n. T he cooler colour s of the p ress now cont rast w it h t he w armer colour s of the w ooden bench.W e now have more colour variety,w hich helps to dif ferenti ate the objects in the scene.

4

Remove the clipped areas

T his global exp osur e chan ge has bl ow n out the hi ghlights. C lick the H ighlight C lipping W arning icon at the top right of the histogram w indow .O ver-exposed highlights w ill appear in patches of red.M ove the cursor onto the far right of the histogram graph.T he W hites sliders w ill become highlighted below .You can click and drag the graph to reduce the W hites to -�� (or drag directly on the W hites sli der).D rag H ighlights to -6� to remove the remaini ng red patches.


5

Improve the global contrast

T o reveal even more mid ton e det ail in the p hoto,drag th e Shadow s sli der right to +7�.T his selectively lightens more of the shadow s,and places them more tow ards the middle of the histogram w indow .You can now see even more detail in the prin ting press,but the photo lacks contrast and there aren’t any st rong blacks on the left of the hist ogram.To i mprove the photo’s overall contrast, drag Blacks left to -6�.

7

Increase the midtone contrast

You now have a healthier-lookin g histogram w ith more information i n the midtones and some contrasting shadow s and highlights.To tease out more midt one detail,drag the Cl arity sl ider to +6�.T his in crease in mi dtone contrast causes fine textures in the metal press an d w ooden bench to jump out .Z oom in to �:� magnif ication to compare the before version of t he image w ith t he after and see the revealed midtone detail.

6

Compare before and after

8

Fine-tune the clipped patches

T ur n on the S hadow C li ppi ng W arn in g (at t he top left of the histogram w indow ).A few blue patches w ill appear,indicating areas of pure bl ack.It’s good to have some black pixels in a photo,and because these areas don’t contain any im portan t detail w e can leave them clipped.Cli ck the Before and A fter icon at the bottom left to see how your processed picture is shaping up.You can n ow see much more detail in the midtones.

G o back to the Loupe view (by clicking its i con or pressing D ).T he edited photo w ill fi ll the w orkspace.T he C larity’s sli der’s i ncrease to midt one contrast may have caused a little clip pin g in t he background’s bri ghter areas,so drag the W hites slider left to -7� to remove some of these clipped patches.A few red patches can remain i n t he brightest w indow s,because these areas contain no i mportant details. 61

Teach your sel fLightroom PH O TO -FIXIN G TO O LS GET THE FILES HERE:


Remove a cast C ounteract w arm or cool tints produced by an incorrect w hite balance using the D evelop module f e re n t l g h t s o u r c e s p r o d c e d f e re t e m e r at u r e s . o a c a m e r a , a t a l c o d e , e a r t if ic i a l r l g h o r a n g e . Yo u r c a m e r a ’ s a u t o m a t i c w ) s e t t g a t te m t s o g e t e d e t a i s in t g t e , s o t h a t o t h e r c o lo u s w l b e t i t l- lo o k i n g . f t h e w t e s o o k t o o a r m ( a w l c o o l t h e m d o . f t e y ’ e t o o c o ld m e ra w l a rm h e m u p o r e o v e th e c o

D ( W o o k i n a t a c a m e r h e c a

n t c o l a y l g h t is a t is a w a r m e r e b a la n c e h e s c e n - f e e a n a n g e ) t h e ( u e ) th e n ld b u e c o lo u r

Cool down the image I m De v d ro p - d o d o n t h c o n o ls

r t YL R e lo p p a n e l w n e n u s e p h o t o a l to m a k e t h

g . n y o u c o u l p re s et f t l e . Yo u e p h o t o

t h e d tr y o m c o u c o o le

L r a r c h a n g s s h o d a ls o r in n

y m i g t to c l c c r e

62

a t iv e l y , y t h e W t n a n a r e a t a rg e t e d a e m p e r a t

o u c a e B a l th a t r e a , e a n

n r e m o v e a n c e S le c s h o u l d b e e n t if ie s d t s l

a s t o r r n d p h u r h i c o lo h o w s c e n

n t h e e n t i e i a g e . f t h e c a m e e c t y t h e n t h e e s u t i g p o t o g l h a v e t h e s c e n e ’s t r u e c o l o u o t o w l o o k o o c o ld o r to o a st a rt i g i a g e is a w e c a r , b e b a la n c e s e t n g h e b a c k g ro u n u r c a s t. e r e ’s a l s o a h t o f a o c o o l h in g s d o w n a n d e m o v e ’s t r u e c o l o u s .

r a b a la n c e a p h l b s . Ho w e v r . h e b u t d u e to d s u f e rs g r e e n t i t e t h e t in t

s t h e w e e t i t - fr e e e r, s o m e t i a c k g ro u n d a n c o r r e c f o m a w a r . W e ’ l s h o w to r e v ea l h

s e s t y o e

Take manual control t A k m

e ’s h e W u t o . t h e T e n t s .

Q h i te h is e m p

c k B a la n c e c o o l e r a tu r e

Use the eyedropper t e r c k e y e d o p p e r o s a m e s t h e a d ju s t s t e T

c c a a o

c a s t s a u t o r ic o n n e u t ra l a n y c o l o d e s to c

Yo u p a e p h o t o i n t o o a m o r e n g r e e n t i t ,

c a l, t h e u r

n

r o d c e g b u t fo r m o r e De v e lo p a l � � � 7 d a g t e T t

o o d r e s u lt s e c o t ro l , c o d u l e. D a e g r e e s K e lv s l e r to + �

n t h e l c k Re g t h e in . o �

Q s e t e m c o u

c k De l a n p e a t n t e ra c A

v e l o p d t a k e t h e s l d e r t t h e

Tweak the colour and tone t o m a t ic a l . c k t h h i te . h u r c a s t a n o u e ra c t

y . e t o o d t h e n it .

O n c e p t o � 8 . o t e a s t o n e c o V b r a n c e t o

y o u ’v e r e m + � � f o r b e o u t th e t ra s t b y a + 6� t o p o d

o v e d r ig h e t e g g c e

t h e t e r w x tu r e g C a s t ro n

c o lo u r ca s t, p u s t e s . Dr a g C o n s o n t h e f lo w e r , r i y t o + � . F a g e r - lo o k i n g c o l

h E p o s u r e t ra s t t b o o s t th e l y , a g o u r s .


AFTER

BEFORE

63


W �n �ntt to know more?

N O W TRY THI TH IS … Click Reset to see the unedited photo. When shooting on location, you can adjust your camera’s white balance setting to help it work out what sort of colour temperature it’s dealing with. The colour temperature of light is measured in degrees Kelvin. You can use Lightroom’s White Balance tools to quickly experiment with a range of different colour temperature presets. Daylight has an average colour temperature of 5500 degrees K, so the Daylight preset cools down our warmer 7350 start file.

64

Artificial tungsten light adds a warm yellow hue, so the Tungsten preset counteracts this with a cold blue temperature setting of 2850. Fluorescent lights can add a greenish hue, so the Fluorescent preset adds a +21 hint of magenta to counteract the green, as well as cooling the photo to 3800. By setting the preset to Auto, Lightroom removes any tints from our starting image’s white areas and produces the best results in this instance, though different photos may need different approaches.

1

2

3

4

Teach Yourse ourself lf B lac ack k & W hite Photography Master mono photography – from visualising the shot to how to get the best results when editing

LE ARN

Teach Yourself Lightroom

Master Your C ano anon n D -S LR C ame amera ra

Get to grips with Adobe’s powerful Lightroom image editing program with our complete instructional course

Get the most out of your new Canon D-SLR with this guide tailored specifically for Canon users

I TH

I DEO

D i scove verr ne new w ski kil lls w i th our ra ran n ge of D V D tr tra ai n i n g cours ourse es

Master Your N ikon D -S LR Camera Get to grips with the all the options, buttons and controls of your new Nikon D-SLR

Teach Yourself Photoshop

Teach Yourself R aw in P hotosho shop p

Complete instructional course on mastering Adobe’s powerful Photoshop CC image editing program

We give a complete guide to unleashing the power of this professional file format

Pick up the DVD for you at

www.bit.ly/photo_dvds

Teach yourself Lightroom SELECTIVE IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS

66

T

h yo

L

SELECTI E IMAGE AD USTMENTS

S Edit selected parts of an image while leaving the rest of the image untouched

68

Remove sensor spots in your images

U se Lightroom’s Spot R emovaltool to remove camera sensor spots and other dust marks w it h a few clicks

72

Dodge and burn in Lightroom

76

Editing in Lightroom with Auto Mask

U se the A djustment br ush to lighten and darken specific areas ofa monochrome image non -destru ctively

80

Use the Graduated Filter tool

82

Master the Radial Filter tool

Learn how to use one ofthe most useful tools for selective adjustmen ts,and di scover how to make essenti aledit s to you r landscapes

Learn how to draw the eye in tow ards your subjects by maki ng cir cular ad justmen ts to your im ages that create a subt le vignet te

Iden ti fy areas to be selecti vely alter ed using the A djustment brush’s A uto M ask and Edi t pin s that enable fin e-tuni ng

67

Teach yourself SELECTIVE IM AG E AD JU STM EN TS GET THE FILES HERE http://bit.ly/tylr2016

AFTER

68

Teach yourself SELECTI E IMAGE AD USTMENTS

BEFORE

R sensor spots Use Lightroom’s Spot Removal tool to remove sensor spots and other dust marks with just a few clicks espite our best efforts to keep our lenses and cameras clean,w e may fin d that some photos suffer from sensor spots.W hen you sw ap lenses over on location,tiny fragments of dirt and dust can enter the camera body and adhere to the sensor.These sensor sp ots can then show up in a photograph as small,soft,dark blobs.T hese blobs are particularly annoying because they appear in the same parts of every p hoto from a shoot.T hey are parti cularly noticeable in clean smooth areas such as skies (as you can see in the st arti ng image). Your D SLR camera may attempt to remove sensor spots by vibrating the sensor,but this automatic mechanical t echnique may n ot p rove effective.For a more thorough clean you can activate the camera’s s ensor cleanin g feature.

D

T his locks up the mi rr or and enab les you to use a blow er brush to dislodge particles of dust w ithout damaging your camera’s m echanis ms.It’s w orth trying to nip sensor spots in the bud,because this w ill s ave you lots of time ‘dust b ustin g’in Lightroom’s d igital dar kroom. Even aft er cleani ng your camera’s sen sor you may find that some sensor spots are still visible. In thi s in stan ce you’ll n eed to take the photo in to Lightroom’s D evelop module and remove the blobs w ith a few clicks of the Spot R emoval tool.T his pow erful tool samples clean sections of the photo that are adjacent to a sensor spot.T he sampled section is then transplanted over the unw anted spot to hide it.T he sampled pixels are seamlessly blended w ith their new surroundings to create an inv isi ble edit ,as you’ll see overleaf. 69

Teach yourself SELECTIVE IMAGE ADJUSTMENTS

1

Import the image

D ow nload our T Y LR ��.dng start image,go to File>Import Photos and V ideo,and bri ng the photo int o Lightroom’s C atalog.W e’ve already cropped the photo and converted it in to black and w hite,but it s uffers from lots of undesirable sensor spots. C lick D evelop in the Library module to take it into that module.G o to the N avigator panel on the left an d click �:�.T his gives us a closer look at the individual pixels.

3

Visualise the spots

G o to the D evelop mod ule’s toolbar (just b elow the histogram w indow )and click the Spot Removal tool icon.You can also summon this tool by pressin g Q .O nce you’ve activated the tool, go to the options bar below the photograph and tick t he V isualize Spots box.T his creates a greyscale preview of the photo.Promin ent sensor spots show up as w hite blobs.M ore subtle spots appear as patches of grey.

70

2

Zoom and pan

O nce you’ve zoomed in usin g the N avigator’s p resets,the H and tool automatically becomes active.C lick and drag the mouse to look at sections of the magnifi ed photo.D ark sensor sp ots are clearly noti ceable because they contrast w ith the light greys of the sky and the w hite foreground foam.Sensor spots are less noti ceable w hen they overlap darker busi er textured areas such as the harbour w all in this image.

4

Adjust the threshold

T o d is cover t he locat ion of more s ubt le s ens or spot s,d rag the V isualize Spots slider to the right.This increases the contrast of the spot visualisation threshold so that the faded grey spots b ecome w hiter and easier t o locate.You’ll also n otice that the cursor changes to show the Spot R emoval tool’s target-shaped circul ar overlay.T his overlay automatically app ears w hen you move the cursor over the photo.


5

Set up the brush

Some of the sensor s pots w ill be larger than the Spot R emoval tool’s ci rcular overlay,so go to the section below the toolbar and increase the Size slider to ��.Set Feather to �7 for a soft edge. T o seaml essly blen d the cl ean p atches of samp led sky w it h t heir new surroundin gs,click the H eal option rather than C lone.H ealing produces an invisible edit that hides the spot more effectively.Place the overlay on a w hite spot and click.

7

Fine-tune the overlays

T ur n V is uali ze Spot s b ack on .C li ck to heal other w hit e and grey spots.To s ee all the O verlays you create,set the Tool O verlay drop-dow n menu to A lw ays.You can drag inside an overlay to fine-tune its p ositi on.D rag the edge of an overlay to shrin k or enlarge it.Y ou can also tap t he left square bracket to shr in k the Spot R emoval tool’s overlay so that it can deal w ith smaller spots.T apping the right square bracket enlarges the overlay.

6

Remove the spots

8

Create irregular overlays

T he Sp ot R emoval tool w il l aut omati cally samp le an adjacent patch of clean sky and t ransplant it over the unw anted spot.A n arrow ind icates that w e’ve taken a patch of clear sky from one circular overlay and placed it into another.T he w hite V isualize Spot w arning in the overlay w ill turn black to indi cate that the targeted sensor spot is no longer vis ible.Clear V isualize Spots to see how effective the Spot Removal tool has been at hiding the targeted sensor spot.

T here’s a str ay hai r on the l eft-han d si de of the f rame.Set Si ze to �� and d rag to paint t he Spot R emoval tool over the hair.T his creates an i rregular shaped overlay that’s perf ect for hi din g the hair w ithout altering too much of the surrounding sky.C ontinue clicking to place circular overlays over the remainin g sensor s pots.W hen hiding spots on the sea you may need to manually reposition the source overlay to sample and transplant similar pixels.C lick D one to fini sh. 71

h

Lightr oom

y o

SELECTIVE IM AG E A DJU STM EN TS GET THE FILES HERE:


Dodge and bur n U se the A djustment brush to lighten and darken specific areas of a monochrome image hen t com es to exp osure,m ost ph otos w

W

th a few slder t eaks in Ligh troo

lb enefi

s Develop

od ule to revealm ore ton ald etai.Th e B asi

onochrom e m dtones to m ake her stand ou t gloom y shado

ere able to target and ad dep en den

pan els Exp osu e slde r m akes glob alad ustm en

that even y l gh en or d arken

e tones in the p ho o.T his

sl er w orks w ellifthe en ti e i age is slgh tly u

eed ed an d

ghten u nd er-exposed shadow s,then you m ay blow out

enabl ng you

th the Ex osu re sl er,then y ou

plun ge the shad ow s into cl pp ed darkness. To h elp yo u m ake select ve ton aladjust se o

er slders (such as H gh gh s an d Sh ado

s)to target

an d adjust speci c ton es,as w e d em on st ated at the start of chapter ou .I n hat w alkthrou gh

72

e l ghtened a m od el

o

ake select ve tonal adjust

ents,bu t w

s spread’s start g i age the cam era h as m etered or the brigh ter sky,so ston es.

ents you can

as

ding d st acti g d etai oo

som e p hotos you’ ln eed m ore tone t eaking precision .In

or clp) correct y ex po sed h gh gh ts.I yo u try to claw back ssi g highl gh t etai

st brigh er and darker ton es

y o each o ther,reveal g detailw here it

Th e H ghl ghts and Sh adow s slders do a go od ob of

er- or

over-exp osed.H ow ever,i you use the Ex po sure sl der t

om a room

s.Th e Highl ghts and Sh adow s s ders

o

e’ e losing d etailin the si ou etted stan

e’ldem onst ate how

ake p ecise ton alad

o u se the A djust ent brush

st en s to rregu ar shapes,so hat

you can achieve a m ore balanced expo sure in a h gh-con scene.Th anks to the Adjust ent brush yo u can d odge gh en )o r bu rn (darken any area.

ast


BEFORE

73


1

Brighten the image

Br in g the TY LR ��.dng startin g image int o Lightroom’s D evelop module.In the Basic panel,click the Black & W hite tab.T his throw s out all the colour i nformation.A t this stage the photo’s murky shadow s lack contrast and d etail.Before w e unleash the A djustment brush,w e can start to improve things w ith the sliders in the Basic panel.D rag Exposure up to +�.��.The histogram now show s more highlight i nformation on the r ight.

3


T o tease out mi ss in g mid ton e detai l,dr ag the C lari ty sli der ri ght to a value of +�� .T his in creases midtone contrast and begins to reveal some of the texture in t he stones.A fter us ing the sliders to imp rove the contrast and reveal more detail,w e can move on to make more targeted and st ronger tonal adjustment s w ith the A djustmen t brush.T his w ill help you to selectively dodge the stones and bur n the sky to reveal more detail.

74

2

Increase the contrast

Increase the Cont rast slider to + 6� f or stronger shadow s and highlights.T he histogram’s shadow s and hi ghlights look n ice and st rong,but there’s a big gap in the midd le,indi cating a lack of midtone detail.To restore detail to the brightest highlights,drag H ighlights dow n to -��.Push W hites to +�6 for a w ider range of tones.A good monochrome conversion should have some black blacks and w hite whites.

4

Set the Adjustment brush

C lick the A djustment brush icon in the toolbar under the histogram w indow (or press K to activate it).A new panel of sliders w ill appear immediately below.C lick the Effect menu at the top of t his p anel and choose D odge (Li ghten).T his adjustment preset automatically s ets the Exposur e slid er to �.�� (and the other sliders to � .M anually increase Exposure to �.7�.Set the brush Size to �� and Feather to ��.


5

Fine-tune the adjustments

C lick to place an Edi t pin on the largest standing stone.Paint the A djustment brus h over the stone to selectively lighten it usi ng Exposure.You can fine-tune the effect of the A djustmen t brush after you’ve painted i t in .Set C ontrast to �6 .Reveal detail in und er-exposed areas by increasin g Shadow s to ��.Tease out more detail by pushing C larity up to ��.T his helps the stony,mossy texture to stand out.

7

Set a new pin

T he dod ged stan di ng st ones have much more i mpact .T o restore detail to the clouds w e need to make a separate selective adjustmen t.In the mask section,cl ick N ew.In the Eff ect section,click the drop-dow n menu and choose Burn (D arken).D rag the Exposur e slider l eft to -�.7�.T o build up t he adjustment in more controllable incremental strokes,go to the Brush section and set Flow to �7.C lick to place a pin on the sky.

6

Create a mask

8

Add impact to the clouds

T ap t he lef t squ are bracket key a few ti mes to d rop the b ru sh tip Size dow n to � (or drag the Size sli der left ).You can then paint w ith the A djustment brush over the background standing stones using the same settings and lighten t hem up.T o see w hich areas a particular Edi t Pi n i s controllin g,move the mouse onto the pin.A red mask w ill appear over the edited areas.W e’ll look at w ays to use masks more effectively overleaf.

T ap t he r ight squ are br acket key a few ti mes to i ncr ease Size to ��,then paint over the clouds to darken their fine midt ones.A void paint ing over the correctly exposed stones.T o give the clouds even more impact,push Cont rast to ��,Shadow s to -7� and C larity to �8.T his increase in midtone contrast teases out the fine textures and details,and adds mood to the composition.D rop Expos ure to -�.8� f or more impact. 75

h

Lightr oom

y o


Editingwith Auto Mask

AFTER

Identify s elect areas to alter using the A djustment brush’s A uto M ask n he p evious spread w e dem on st ated h ow

O

o u se the

Ad ustm ent brush to do dge the d ark stand ng ston es,w hi bu rning

ore detaili

size,sof ness and

arget and

o the b righ er sky.B y al eri g the

ow of he A djust

eak the tones o speci c ob ects w

cl ck a ph oto w

ent brush,yo u can h prec sion .W hen you

h the A djustm en t brush yo u p ace an Ed t pi .T his pi

ecords the p osi on and st ength o allthe tonalad ustm ents you Th anks to Edit pins yo u can m ake m ul ple adjust

then cl ck a p n to fi e-tun e i s ef ect at any ti e in th e f cl ck a p n an d drag it to the righ t,you can

ake.

ents o a ph oto and re.If yo

crease the val e sett

of each associated sl der to,say,brigh en the i age m ore or boo st the con trast m ore.D ag left on a p n o ed ce the sl de r setti gs. In step six o n he p evious spread w e introdu ced m asks.By

oving

the m ou se over a part cular pi ,yo u can see a red m ask overlay that dicates w hich areas a e bei g adj sted b y that pi .T he A djustm en brush st ok es w e u sed to l gh en the ston es w ere soft an d i precise, so the b rush tip co or grou nd .In

d stray over the back grou d an d l gh en

he folow ng

alkthrou gh w e’lshow you how

e sky o u se

A uto M aski g to d od ge and bu rn m ore precisely,to l gh en the ci cular gh t orbs w thou t blow cavernou s shadow s w

BEFORE

76

g ou t

e backgrou d d etai s,and deep en the

hou t darkening he surroun ding

oss.



77

h

Lightr oom

y o

SELECTIVE IM AG E AD JU STM EN TS GET THE FILES HERE:

Improve the tonal range

1

Dow nload Easter_egg_hun o Lightroo

ow -con

s Library an d cl ck the Develop

ast star ng

age lacks pu nch n he shado

highl ghts.In he h stogram be d arker,becau se the graph

2

pg to yo ur com pu er,i po rt od

e.T

s and the

nd ow you can see that the b ack cou

To brigh ten the l gh t orbs in the forest,first press K to select he A djust ent brush.T hen ,boo st he W hi es se

chan ge you r brush settings.I ncrease Feather and Flow

oesn t qu te stretch to the far eft.D rag

hites a tou ch to brigh en the lgh t orbs.

ow ng b rush w

lh elp yo u to m

c the n aturalglow of he eggs

Erase the problematic areas

overlay on p erm anen y by ticking the Sh ow Selected M ask Overlay box at he bo

Set Size to 12 and chan ge Fea her and Flow

om -left of he p hotograph.S om e of he A djust ent

o aroun

50 each. T e orbs n at aly h ave a slgh t glow so h avi g a soft

4

I you ho ver the cu sor over the Ed t pin, you lsee a red m ask overlay i dicati g the al eady ed ed areas.You can turn the

ng up

scattered on the orest f oo

Activate the mask overlay ask

o to t e B rush section on the right and cl ck Erase,(you can also do

his tem po ar y by ho ding he A t key d ow n on you

keybo ard).T his gives you a n ew cursor

h a m nu s icon nside it o 10 0 or a m ore accura

brush’s st okes m ay have st ayed o ver the l ghter back groun d d ue to

brush edge.Au o M ask Bo x en ables the Erase brush o u nd erstand

the dif erent s zes of the eggs.Fort

chan ges in con

or a m ore precise ad

78

Adjust the brush attributes

o aroun d + 35 and set your brush size to 20 .N ext,sc olldow n and

the B acks slder eft or m ore dra atic and darker shad ow s.B oo st the

3


ately,yo u can tidy up the m ask

st en t af er the act.

ast.T here are sect on s that need em oving com pletel

thou gh,so u tick this w hile usi g t e Erase brush


5

Use Auto Mask

T he A uto M ask feature w il l also help w hen maki ng add it ion al selections w ith the A djustment brush.In the B rush section click back on A to access your original A djustment brush s ettings.T ick the A uto M ask box.N ow click ‘N ew ’at the top of the Br ush panel,to make a new brush pi n f or us to make different adjustments.Set Blacks to -35 and C larity to 25.Paint over the darker s hadow s on the image to deepen them further and i ncrease mid-tone contrast for an added boost.

7

Remove the distractions

N ow that you’ve darkened the forest fl oor shadow s and made the light orbs are glow a brilli ant w hite,check that the rest of the image has no distractions.T he floor is covered in leaf li tter and sticks,and at the bottom of the frame is a bright green leaf. It di stracts from the w arm tree trunk,so select the Spot R emoval brush w ith Q and paint over the leaf.T he brush automatically chooses a suitable place to clone from so the leaf disappears.

6

Turn off the mask

8

Add the finishing touches

A uto M ask should avoid selecting lighter background details, so you w on’t need to do too much painting.Keep A uto M ask active as you paint around any remain ing shadow s to darken the cracks and crevices w hile leaving the moss and light orbs untouched.T urn off A uto M ask w hen painti ng w hole areas of shadow that have no moss or light orbs to produ ce a more even-looking tonal adjustment .T urn of f the mask overlay to see the lightened tones of the rocks.

N ow that the w hites are bright and the shadow s deep,it’s tim e to add a fin al polish to the overall image.D eselect your Spot R emoval brush by pressing Q again,and this time scroll up to the V ibrance and S aturation section un der the Basic tab in the D evelop module.Increase V ibrance to +40 to boost the more muted colours unt il t hey’re nearly as strong as the bri ghter colours.T hen add + 15 Saturation to give the w hole scene some pi zzazz. 79

h

Lightr oom

y o



BEFORE

The Gr aduated Fil tertool


Learn how to use one of the most useful tools for selective adjustments,and how to make essential edits to your lands capes he G adu ated Fi er is on e of the m ost usef ltool

T

that Ligh troo m has o n o

er.I t

orks by crea

hat land scape ph otograph er

often en cou

an

so i you expo se for the land ,then

un af ected,w

age.T he area beh

d yo ur fi st po

ti

h a blend n bet een.W hat m akes it such

oo lis t e fact t at,j st lke the Rad alFi er an

er is that skies are brigh er t an the lan

bright,or som et ut m

es even co

he sky com es out too

pletely

hi e w

h no deta

ch l ke tradition allen s-based gradu ated ne utral

den si y fi ers,yo u can u se the Ligh troo m

oo lto d arken

Ad ustm ent Brush tools,you h ave com plete control bo h over

sky for a m ore even exp osure.How ever,the con

olgoes w ay

the area it af ects,an d the typ e of on alch ang es t at you

beyon d b asic expo sure chan ges:you can add con

ast,bo ost

ke to m ake in that a ea.Y ou can clck an d drag a l e in any ection to create yo r blend ,b t the classic exam ple 80

er in action s to darken a sky n

and scape.On e p ob em

a gradated tonal blend bet een an y tw o p oints i

com pletely affected,an d b eyon d y ou r second po nt rem ains a p ow erf

of a gradu ated

colou r and brush o ut areas you w ant to exclud e f om effect.Here’s how

t

orks…

he


1

Dial in some under-exposure

Br ing your chosen i mage into L ightroom’s D evelop modul e, then grab the G raduated Filter tool from the toolbar at the top right of the interface.N otice that w hen you click the tool, a set of sliders appears directly below it.T hese closely resemble the Basic panel sliders,but the difference is that they w ork in combin ation w ith t he tool.Set Exp osure to -�.�7.

3

Add more gradients

You can add as many gradients as you l ike.Simply click and drag elsew here in the image to make another,then adjust the sliders below the toolbar to change how the area looks.T he tool w ill remember previous settings,but you can quickly reset everything to default values by double-clicking Effect,or by double-clicking on in dividual sli ders to reset them.

2

Drag a gradient

C lick and drag dow n from t he top of the image to darken the sky.You can hold dow n Shift as you drag if you w ant to keep the lines perfectly hor izontal.If you w ant to tw eak the gradient,drag the upper or low er lin es to change the w idth of the blend (hold dow n A lt and d rag to move both at once)or drag the centre lin e to adjust the angle.

4

Erase the mask

T he gradien t over the s ky here i s also darken in g the lighthouse,but you can exclude it from the effect.C lick Br ush at the top right (next to N ew and M ask),then go to the Br ush settings below the tool’s tonal sliders.C hoose A or B to add to the effect,and Erase to exclude,then paint over the area.Press O to toggle the mask overlay so you can see w hat’s affected. 81

Teach your sel fLightroom SELECTIVE IM AG E A DJU STM EN TS GET THE FILES HERE:



The Radial Filter Learn how to draw the eye tow ards your subject by making circular adjustments to your images s t k e t h e t o o t h e r s e l e c t iv e t o o s – t h e G a d u a te d F e r a n d d j s t e n t B r u s h – t h e Ra d a l F t e r t o o l e n a b e s y o u t o a t e r t h e t o n e s p a r ts o f a n i a g e . e d i f e re n c e is in t h e w a y y o d e f i e t h e a r e a y o u d k e t o c h a n g e . W h i e t h e A d ju s t m e n r u s h o r k s b y p a i n t i g a n d t h e G a d a te d F e r w o r k s b y c r e a t i g a s t ra i g h t - l e d e n , t h e Ra d a l F t e r e n a b e s y t o c re a t e a c i c u a r b le n d b e t w e e n t h e a r e a a f e c t e d b y t h e o n a l c h a n g e s , a n d h e a re a t h a t re m a i s u n a f e c t e d . s s u c h t ’s v e r y u s e f u l r c r e a t i g s u t le v g n e t t e s t h a t d a w t h e e y t o w a r d s y o u r s u b je c t a n d a w a y f o m d i s t a c t i g e d g e d e t a i s , o r fo r s o f e n in g p a r ts o f an a g e y o u a n t t o d e - e m p h a s is e . He r e w e ’v e s e d t h e t o o l o r t w o v e r y e r e n t t a s k s . F r t h e f i s t la n s c a p e a g e , y o u c a n a g a c i rc le t o d a r k e n d o w n t h e c o r n e r s o f th e f ra m e a n d e a d t h e e y e to w a rd s t h e d i s a n t l g h h o s e . d f o r t h e s e c o n d i a g e , y o u c a n a d d o c i c u la r a d ju s t m e n t s – o n e t o c la w b a c k b o w n - o u t d e t a i n h e a r m , a n d h e o t h e r t o a d d c o n a s t o e fa c e .

J

Drag a circle r t t c 82

r i g t h e s ta g r a b t h e Ra d ig h t . h i s o p e n s o d a l n t o n a l c h h e n d r a g a c i c le o r n e rs o f th e

r t g i a l F t e u p a s e a n g e s f o v e r th a g e .

r t o e

BEFORE

Add a vignette a g e i o t l f r o f s l d e r t h e t o g h t h o

t h e De v e lo p m t h e t o o b a r s b e lo w t h a t o l . S t E p o s u u s e t o s u b t ly

o d u a t t h c a n b r e to d a r k e

l e a n e t o p e u s e d - � . � , n t h e

I f t h e o v e t h a t c a n e l d o n t to y o u w a n t o v ig n e t te , h o

c i rc le i t. W p . Ho l m a k e s n a p d d o w

i s n ’ t h e n d d o w t h e s t h e c i n

e r f e c t ly a k i g a c i n S i ft fo ta r t p o t c le to t h e d / C l a n

p

s it i e d , r a g t h e c le t h e r e a r e a f e w s r a p e r f e c t c i r c le , a n th e c o r n e r o f th e c i e d g e s o f th e i m a g e d d o u b e - c l c k w t h

n t o h o r tc u t s d o l d c le . fo r a th e t o o l

T

h yo

L

SELECTI E IMAGE AD USTMENTS

AFTER

3

Erase parts of the mask

M ove on to th e port rait i mage.D rag a fresh cir cle over the face,then di alin Exposur e -�.��,H ighlights -��. T his imp roves the elbow ,but m akes the hand t oo dark.C lick Br ush at t he top-right,then go to the Br ush settings below the t onalslid ers and click E rase.Press O to t oggle the mask overlay on,and pain t t o erase the mask over th e hand.

4

Change inside the circle

You can also make ci rcular adjustm ent s th at affect t he inside rather t han the outside ofthe circle.H old dow n C md/C tr l�A lt,and d rag the pin on t he face to make a copy of the or igin alcircle.Check Invert M ask below the ton alslid ers, th en dou ble-click Effect to reset them alland d iali n C ont rast �� t o add pu nch to t he face. 83

Teach yourself Lightroom SPECIAL EFFECTS

84

T

h yo

L SPECIAL EFFECTS

S e f f e c t s Improve your photos fast with easy-to-apply special effects in Lightroom

86

Master the HSL panel in Lightroom

90

Make better black and white images

94

Apply the split-tone effect to your mono images

Enhance a photo by targeting specific colour s and changing thei r hu e,saturati on and lum i nan ce values

Selecti vely li ghten or dar ken greyscale tones in a mono conversion based on the or iginal colou rs of an i mage

A dd separate w ashes ofcolour to the shadow s and hi ghlights ofyour monochrome photos to rep li cate th e spli t-t on e effect

96

Create high dynamic range images

D iscover how to combi ne several exposures i nt o a sin gle,highly d etailed i mage usin g Lightroom’s pow erfulH D R M erge feature

98

Apply a Post Crop vignette

A dd mood to an i mage by darkenin g its corners and edges,then crop to im prove compositi on w it hout affecti ng the vignette

10 0

Add effects to video clips

Li ghtr oom offers mor e than just sti ll image edit in g.U se the Q ui ck D evelop panelto tw eak colour and t one i n a vi deo clip

85

h

Lightr oom

y o

SP EC IA L EFFEC TS GET THE FILES HERE:


Masterthe HSLpanel Enhance a p hoto by targeting specific colours and changing their hue,saturation and luminance values er ain colou s are w eaker in som e p ho os than

C

n others.If yo u bo ost the overallco ou r i en si

a problem at c ph oto.In ou r un processed star ng

slder,then

su set is slgh tly b ow n ou t,and

eaker colou s w

lh ave m ore i pact

ead o colou rs t at w on t pri t correctly b ecau se they ed an d lacking in d etai.I n ad

be

tion ,a m od els skin ton es

ay becom e too orange an d gar sh.T he Vibrance sl der i design ed to so ve this problem by en abl g yo u o i crease he saturat on of

eaker colou s w

ho t over-sa

at g the

st on ger on es.I t also tend s to b oo st aturallan dscape colou such as blues and greens m ore s on gly than oranges,w hich el s you

86

al ernative co ou r-t eaki g tools that can h elp yo u en ance

of the i age u si g the B asic pan els S aturat on

bu t he stron ger on es m ay becom e over-satura ed.T his ca cl

If you v enture beyon d the B asic panely ou lfind som

o avo d creat g over-sat ated sk n ton es.

age the

e’ e losing the v bran

colou s that w e saw on ocation .T e h nd er-expo sed,so w e can’t see the text

s an d sho el ne ar es and co ou

n these d ark areas.T he H SL H ue, Saturation ,L gh tness) pa eloffers a po

erf lan d e

ective w ay to target speci

colou s (such as the oranges an d eds o ch an ge n ot o gh

ess (

he sun set)an

y their colou r i en si y b t also th ei an ce).T

s en ables yo u o

gh en an d bo ost

spe ci c region s based on their colou s,as you lsee in the alkthroug h overleaf

Teach yourself Lightroom SPECIAL EFFECTS

BEFORE

87

Teach yourself SPECIAL EFFECTS

1

Use Solo Mode

Import T Y LR �7.dng int o Lightroom and then take it into the D evelop module.H ere w e’ll use the Basic and H SL panels to darken the photo’s blow n-out highlights,lighten its un der-exposed shadow s and boost w eak colours.You’ll be jumpi ng from one panel to another,so right-click any panel and choose Solo M ode.T his means that w hen you click to open one panel,the previous one w ill close. T his creates a ti di er,cleaner w orks pace.

3

Darken the sky

C lick the G raduated Filter icon in the toolbar below the histogram w indow .C hoose Exposure from the Effect menu. Set the Exp osure sli der to -�.��.T he other slid ers should be set to �.C lick at the top of the frame and drag dow n to the horizon.T his creates a gentle gradated tonal adjustmen t t hat darkens t he top of t he frame and reveals more colour and texture detail in t he blow n-out clouds.Click D one.

88

2

Lighten the shadows

O pen the Basic panel.H ere w e can make some global adjustmen ts to t he photograph and then refin e them usin g the H SL panel.D rag the Shadow s slid er right to a value of +�7. T his targets an d l ightens the u nd er-expos ed l ands cape’s shadow s w ithout over-exposing the brighter sky’s highlights.To selectively darken the sky w e can use the G raduated Filter that w e introduced in the previous chapter.

4

Expand the tonal range

By lookin g at the his togram w e can see that the graph doesn’t quite stretch to the far right.T his in dicates that the photo lacks strong highlight i nformation.C lick the cursor on the far right of the histogram w indow and the W hites slider w ill automatically become highlighted.Cli ck and drag right to increase the W hites slider setting to +��.You now have a w ider ranger of tones w ith some dark shadow s and bright highlights.


5


T o ref in e colour s and ton es i n select ed p arts of the p hotograph, click the H SL panel,and then click on the Saturation tab.By draggin g the O range sli der to +7 � you can boost the colours of the sun set w ithout alt erin g the colours in the rest of the photo.If you’re not su re w hich colours are present in a darker area,click the T argeted A djustmen t tool icon at the top left of the Saturation tab,then cli ck a green hill to target it.

7

Lighten specific colours

T he green hi ll s ar e mor e satu rated,bu t they’re s ti ll lost in the shadow s.To selectively lighten them,click the Luminance tab.C lick the T argeted A djustment tool on a hill to sample it and drag upw ards to lighten t he sampled colours.Let the Yellow s shoot up to a brighter +7�.T he sampled G reens w ill in crease by a lesser increment.M anually drag the G reen slid er up to +86 to lighten them a bit more.

6

Make targeted adjustments

8

Fine-tune the highlights

C lick and drag upw ards w ith the targeted A djustment tool. T his tool w il l samp le t he colou rs in that sp ecif ic area and in crease their saturati on.A lthough the hill l ooks green to the naked eye,there are lots of yellow s in t he sampled area.T his causes the G reen and Y ellow slider to move to the right.Stop dragging upw ards w hen Yellow is at +�� and G reen is around a value of +�6.You can manually tw eak indivi dual sliders too.

By boosting the Saturation and Luminance of the Yellow s and G reens w e can see more of the scene’s colour,texture and detail.H ow ever,the lighter yellow s have blow n out the sky a litt le, so click the G raduated Filter icon,click its grey Ed it pin to reactivate the adjustable sli ders associ ated w ith t hat adjustment ,and drag the Expos ure slid er left to a darker -�.�� to reveal a litt le more detail in the sky ’s bri ghtest highlights. 89

Teach yourself Lightroom SPECIAL EFFECTS GET THE FILES HERE http://bit.ly/tylr2016

90


BEFORE

r and

e

Selectively lighten or darken greyscale tones in a mono conversion based on the original colours of the image hen shooting w ith black-and-w hite film,pre-digital photographers could also place a coloured filter over the camera’s len s to prod uce more stri kin g monochrome pictures.D ifferent coloured filters w ould lighten or darken the greyscale tones of sp ecifi c objects in t he scene.For example,if y ou placed a red fi lter over the lens i t w ould make blue skies become dark greys in the monochrome print, enabling lighter clouds to pop out in contrast. M any digital cameras enable you to use a M onochrome picture style setting to produce a black-and-w hite photo in camera.You can even set the camera to apply colour f ilters t hat help lighten or darken greyscale tones in particular areas, such as blue skies or green fi elds.T his in -camera approach can be very hit and miss,so w e’ll show

W

AFTER

you how to take more control of greyscale tones in your monochrome conversions in Lightroom. T here are s everal w ays t o cr eate a mon ochrom e image in Lightroom.If you simp ly throw aw ay a photo’s colour inf ormation by setting Saturation to � ,you’ll get an in stant mono conversion, but you ris k producin g a drab w ash of greyscale tones that sw allow up your subject’s f eatures, especially if they consist mostly of mid tones.A n eye-catching monochrome photo should have a w ide range of tones,from black shadow s through greyscale midtones to w hite highlights.A stronger tonal con trast help s to br in g out a model’s shape and contours,as you can s ee in our after image. In the w alkthrough overleaf w e’ll demon strate how to use the B& W panel to selectively lighten or darken greyscale tones. 91


1

Convert to mono

Import T Y LR � �.dng into L ightroom,and take the photo into the D evelop module.G o to the Basic pan el and click on the Black & W hite tab.This desaturates the photo,but the result is a mass of murky mi dtones and s hadow s.If you look at the histogram w ind ow ,you can see that the mono conversion l acks highlight detail.It also looks under-exposed to the naked eye. W e need to improve the photo’s contrast.

3

Examine the histogram

A fter li ghtening greyscale tones that correspond to orange colours in the starti ng image,the tones i n the histogram w ind ow ’s graph have slid ri ght tow ards the highlight section. W e still need to boost the contrast,because an effective blackand-w hite photo should have some black shadow s and bri ght w hite highlights.If you move the cursor over the middle of the graph you’ll see that the Exp osure slider i nfluences thi s section.

92

2

Lighten the colours

Scroll dow n and click the B& W panel.W hen you convert a photo to mon ochrome,Lightroom automatically adjusts the position of the Black & W hite mix sliders to try to get an effective black-and-w hite photo.You can fin e-tune the results by manually tw eaking the position of specifi c sli ders.In this image,dragging O range up to +� � lightens s ome of the subject’s sk in t ones and makes them stand out against t he shadow s.

4

Increase the exposure

C lick the middle of the histogram w indow and drag right to push t he Expos ure up to +� .76 (or drag the Exposu re slider to the ri ght if you prefer).N ow that you’ve remapped t he photo’s w eaker midton es to a bri ghter tonal level,this gives the graph a w ider s pread of tones.Increase the strength of the tones by pushin g the C ontrast slid er up to +�8.T he higher contrast photo now has more impact,and you have a healthier-lookin g histogram.


5

Lighten the shadows

T o ch eck that you can see d arker det ail, cli ck the Sh adow C lipping W arning icon at the top left of the histogram w indow .A reas that w ill print as pure black w ill appear as patches of blue.In thi s case,none of the model’s detail s are clipp ed,but some the shadow s lack detail.Push the Shadow s slider up to +�� . R eveal more detail in the model’s darkest contours by draggin g the Blacks slider to +�7.

7

Fine-tune the greys

T his cont rast boost rein trod uces som e cl ip pi ng i n the background shadow s,but there are no important details in these regions to w orry about.Turn the Shadow C lipping W arning off.You can now go back to the B& W tab and fine-tune the conversion.Push Reds up to +�� to lighten the greys that correspond to this range of colour in the original photo.W e now have a str ikin g high-contrast mono conversion.

6

Boost the contrast

8

Add the finishing touches

T o hel p reveal the shap e an d for m of our fi ne-ar t nu de w e can pus h the contrast even furt her,courtesy of the T one C urv e t ab.T his pow erf ul tool enab les you to s elect ively lighten or darken t ones in a variety of w ays,as you’ll s ee from our in-depth look at the Tone C urve in the follow ing chapter. In this in stance,simply click the Point C urve drop-dow n menu and choose Strong C ontrast.

Some of the model’s curves are represen ted by sub tle greyscale tones.To help emphasise these areas,go back to the Basic panel and go to the Presence section.D rag the C larity slider right to a value of +��.T his increase in C larity boosts the contrast of the fine midtones to help emphasise the sub ject’s cur ves and contours .It als o gives the f in ish ed photograph a bit more punch. 93

Teach your sel fLightroom SP EC IA L EFFEC TS GET THE FILES HERE:


Split-tone effect A dd separate w ashes of colour to shadow s and highlights e n s h o o t i g a la n d s c a p h o t o g r ap h c a n la c k i a n d a n a b s e c e o f c o n t b e l o s t in h e d t o n e s e th in g m u c h o r e s t r ik i n g – - to n e d i a g e . M o n o c h o m e p a t ic , b u t b y r e i t r o d c i g a h c a n e v o k e s p e c i c m o o d s a n d y o u h o w o u s e L g h t ro o s p e n d e n y t in t a m o n o c o n v e r g h t s w t h t w o d s t c t c o lo u

W s o m s p l a m y o u s h o w n d e g h

p e p a ra s . a d h o

o n a d u l d a y , y o u r c t d u e t o d r a b c o lo u t . t e re s t i g d e t a il c a n u t y o u c a n p o d u c e ra m a t c h ig h - c o n a s t t o s ca n lo o k e x t re m e l t o f c o lo u r i o t h e s c e a d d m o r e v a r e ty . W e ’ S l t T o n in g p a n e l s io n s s h a d o w s a n d h e s .

Adjust the exposure a k e p a n e p h o t o . h E p o s u r e o n t ra s t

T YL R l, c l c k t e h s to g r g h t to s l d e r to

g i t h e B a c k r a m s h o + � � to + � � a n d

o t h e & W s a la b r ig h d o p

De v e l o p e t a b t c k o f t e n t h H g h g h

Improve the contrast o d e . n o d e s a t u r a te d t o n e d e t a i g s u p . c r e t s t o - � � .

t h e B a s i t h e . D a g a s e t h e

Tint the highlights o a d d a g h g h t s H g h g h t s s e c t i a r e d t i t . Yo u c a c o l o u , o r d r a g t h 94

s h e s o f c o , t o g g l e o p , r a g S n c l c k t h e e H e s l

lo u e n t u r s w e r

BEFORE

r to t h e t h e S a t i n t o a tc h c o t o 6� t o

e r e s t S a d o s u a r i y u p e x t u r e s in

t re e s t a n d s o f t h e e t a p o + � 7 o t o + 8 � y o u t h e m o s s y

o t w h e e i t o v e r la p s t h e s k y il s lo s t in a m a s s o f m t o n e l g h t e n t h e f o re g ro u n d . y d c r e a s e m d t o n e c o n t ra s t a n r o c k s a n d b a d e s o f g r as s .

, b u t s . Dr a g g in d r e v

t a g g e a l

Adjust the balance p h o t T o � 6. n o a d d

t o ’s s h a d o n g t a b . y e f a u t s a m p l e a a w a s h o f

w s a n d n t h e t s a d n e w s e p a .

S t a s u b t le w c o n t ra s t s D a g B a la

t t h e S a d o w s S t e c o r in t h e a s h o f p u r p le . W w t h t h e c o ld e r c n c e le f t o - � � o

t u r a t o a r k e r e n o w o o u s m a k e

n s l e r a r e a s . Dr h a v e a w in t h e f o t h e p u r p

to a g a r r e e

� t o r e H e t o e r sk y g ro u d d o a

v e a l � f t h a t a n d s c a p e . n t .


T

e t

Produce a wide range of looks by experimenting with the options in Lightroom’s Presets panel

Subtle tints

Stronger saturation

H ere you can see the result of the four-step w alkthrough on the previous page.T he tw o contrasting w ashes of colour are subtle,so that the split-toning effect gently enhances the monochrome conversion w ithout being overtly noticeable.

In thi s example w e’ve kept t he original spl it-ton ed colours featured in our w alkthrough,but w e’ve boosted the Saturation of bot h colours to 6� and reduced the Balance slider to � .T he stronger colours emphasise the contrast betw een t he sky and land.

Alternative Balance

Surreal effect

In thi s version w e’ve used the colours from version one and the Saturation sett in gs from version tw o,but w e’ve pushed the Balance sli der ri ght to +�6.T his makes the highlight’s sepia colour more dominant,leaving a hint of purp le in t he shadow s.

W e produced this surreal version of the landscape by setting the H ighlights H ue to �� and Saturation to 6 �.T he green Shadow s have a H ue of ��7 and a Saturation of �� .T he Balance of +�� stops the midtones in the clouds from being tinted green. 95



Create HDR images D iscover how to combine s everal exposures into a single, highly detailed image using Lightroom’s H D R M erge feature g h t ro o s H DR e a t u r e e n a b l e s y o u o e r g e s e v e r a l e r e n t e x o s u r e s i o o n e , o v a h g h d y a m c r a n g e w t h d e t a l n t h e b r ig h e s t h ig h l g h t s a n d d a r k e st sh a d o w s ( h ic h m a k e s th e a r t c u a r ly s e f u l o r h g h - c o t r a s t l a n s c a p e s a n ). e s t o f a l , t t h e n c r e a t e s a m e r g e d DNG r a w f i t h t o n a l o r m a t io n . U n d e r s t a n a b l y , t h e f e a t - d e p t h a s d e d c a t e d HDR s o f t a r e l k e P t o m a t i HDR E e x P , r e v e n P t o s h s o n M e r g e t o

L e a t u r e p t e r i r s p a c k e d s n t a s i r N s

HDR c o m a n . t L g h t ro o s a p f f e r e n t . I t c r e a t e s a d e t a i l- r i c h r a w e o v e r - p r o c e s s e d lo o k t h a t p u s m H D R. s s u c h , t ’ s m r e H D R a s a a ll t h e e t te r f r it . W e l t e d , t HDR c o m a n d a r e v e r y e f f e c t iv e . e a t e , s o a s lo n g a s c a m e ra m o v e m c a n g e t a a y w h e rg in g h a n d - h e a De g h o s t c o n t r o l o f x m o v e m e n t

Start HDR Merge Yo u l a m e o r t e d i a s t f a m e t c o m a n : a g e s a n d

t , a g f ir g in t -

t h e a c h e s a r e s t a n t h e H DR c l c k t h e d / C + H

Fix ghosting movement c lo u d s a re a f o n g S o w h ic h 96

g i f a n r g e y o a ls o

Improve the tones

e e d a s e t o f i a g e s t a k e n n a l g n e n s e t a t a d i e r e n t e x p o s u e . O n c e t h e i m t o L g h t ro o , S i ft - c l c k b e t w e e n t h e o s e l e c t t h e m . e r e a re t h r e e w a y s t o b e g o t o P o t o > P o t o M e r g e > H D R, o r r i g h c h o o s e Po t o m e r g e , o r s i p l y p e s s C

h e De g h o s t a o u n t w l h e lp o h in t h e f a m e – p e r h a p s f o m , o r in t h s c a s e p e o p e – b y a k i n o m a s i g le f ra m e r a th e r th a n b y w t h f o u r d e g h o s t g s t re n g t h s , t d e g h o s t o v e r la y ’ o p t io n t h a t e n a b a r e as a re b e in g c o r re c te d . W e u s e

o a c h s s l g h t l f i e w t h t re s u t i a n y p h o o g r a p h e rs o t i t y t h a n a s a s t y l e , h e o p t i s in t h e M e e r e ’s a n A t o A g n e n t is n ’ t to o s e v e r e , l d s e q u e n c e s . h e r e ’s n t h e f a m e .

c o r re c t o v in g g g t h e p o b e rg i g s e h e r e ’s a l s o e s y o u o d M e d iu m

o n e a t h e De v

e r i e

a l g b o x in a g e lo p

e A u t o A n e n t b l b r in n d h a t s , y o u c a o d u l e ’s

g n b o x t o t e t w e e n e a c h g o u t d e t a il th is is n o n - d n c h a n g e th e B a s ic p a n e l

h e to p a m e n s h a d e s t ru c A u t o

- r ig h is s l o w s t iv e , T o n e

t g h a n d s o o s e t

l e lp if y o f f. h h i g h l g h n c e y o u n g s w

t h e e A s . e rg e h t h e

Merge and enhance o v e m e n t ra s s o r e m a t i v e r a l a h e lp f u l s e e e x a c t l h e r e .

c k M e f i e w t h a k e th e n e w e n h a n c e m e n t s . a n o r m a l p h o t o s to p s ). Us e t h e h t h e A d ju s t

r g e a n d L g h t ro o m l c r e a t e a n e w r a w DNG t h e s u f f x HDR a n d a d d t t o y r L r a r y . a g e in t o t h e De v e lo p o d u le fo r fu r th e r h e r e ’s f a r m o r e t o n a l n f o r m a t o n h a n (o r e x a m p l e , E p o s u r e g o e s f o m - � o � o n a l t o o ls a n d a k e s e l e c t iv e a d j s t e n e n t B r u s h t o i p ro v e t h e i a g e

Teach yourself Lightroom SPECIAL EFFECTS AFTER


BEFORE

BEFORE

BEFORE

BEFORE

97



Apply a vignette A dd mood to an image by darkening its corners and edges e fo l o w n g a lk t h r o u g h o l o w s o n o m o u e a r l e r S t - t o n e e f fe c t t u t o r ia l, s o e ’ ll o r k i g o n a s p - t o n e d v e r s o n o f o u r s ta r t a g e . f y o u a v e n ’ t o l o w e d e p e v io u a lk t h r o u g h y o u c a n d o w n l o a d a s p l - t o n e d v e r s io n o f th e p h o t o f o m e l k a b o v e . O u r la n d s c a p e s t a r t g i a g e o o k s m o r e i e r e s t g t h a n k s t o t h e s p t - to n e e f fe c t a n d t h e c r e a s e i n c o t ra s t , b u t t e s k y s t i l a c k s p a c t d u t o t h e r e l a t iv e l y b a n d c l o u s . W e c a n l s o m e o f t e e m s p a c e a t t e t o p o f t h e f ra m e b y a d g a v g n e t te . V g n e t te s o c c u r n a t u r a l y b e c a u s e l e s s l g h t e n e r s t e e d g e o f a le n a n d c a u s e s t h e c o r n e r s o f t e p o t o t o l o o k a l t le d a r k e r . d e l b e r a te ly d a r k e n g t h e e d g e s o f t e i a g e in L g h o o e c a n g iv e t h e s k y ’s f a t w e h g h g h s m o r e t o n a l v a r ie ty . Da r k e r d e t a i s a t t e t o p o f t h e f r a m e w l e l p t o g v e t h a n d s c a p e m o r e b a la n c e , b e c a u s e t h e y ’ l e c h o e d a rk e r to n e s o f t h e g r o u d . A v i g n e t e w l a ls o h e lp o a d d a t o u c h o f a t o s p h e re to o u r b le a k la n d s ca p e . O n c e y o u v e a d d e d a v ig n e t te , y o u a y d e c id e o c r o p t h e p h o t o to c h a n g e i s c o m p o s i o n . n s o e a p p c a t o n s y o u o u d c r o p o t y o u r v ig n e t e d e d g e s . s i s n a m e s u g g e s t s L g h t r s Ps t - C r o p V g n e t t e t o o l s c l e v e r e n g h t o e a p p y t h e v g n e t e e f e c t o y o r re c o m p o s e d p h o o .

T

Add a vignette n t h e De v e l o p o d e , c l n t h e Ps t - C r o p V g n e t t H g h g h t P o r i y . Dr a g A o u c o r n e s a n d s o e o f t h e e d g e s M t o � o h e 98

BEFORE

Refine the vignette c k t h e E e c t s e t . Le a v e t h t to - � � . s in o r a n d s c a t r e

p a e l, t h e n e S y le s e t d a r k e n s t h p e . c re a s e

c l c k t e e

y d e f a u lt s u t s t h e p Ro u d n e s s l e f t y D a g it r g h t t o + d a r k e n s t h e v e r t

a Ro u o t o s o u g e t � � t o c c a l e d g

d n la n a m r e a e s

e s s o f � c re a te s a n o v a l s h a p e t h a t s c a p e o r ie n t a t o n . f y o u r a g o r e r e c ta n g u a r - s h a p e d v i g n e t te . te a m o r e o v a l- s h a p e d v i g n e t te t h a t a b t m o r e . Le a v e F a t h e r o n � � .

AFTER

3

C rop the photo

C lick the C rop O verlay icon i n t he toolbar below the histogram.T he crop overlay w illappear over the ent ir e photo.C lick O ri ginaland choose a new aspect ratio such as �:�.T hi s changes the crop overlay to a squ are shape.D rag in side t he crop over lay to i nclud e allt he bran ches.

AFTER

4

E xamine the pos t-crop vignette

C lick D one to apply t he crop and create a square version of the landscape.T hi s loses the bland edges of the frame and makes the tr ee more prom in ent.T he vignette effect w e created earlier w illreappear in the new corners of the cropped photo. 99



Add effects to video clips Lightroom offers more than just still image editing.You can use the Q uick D evelop panel to tw eak colour and tone in a video clip s t d ig it a l c a m e r a s h a v e t h e c a p a c i y o c a p t u g h - d e f i t io n v i d e o c l p s , s o y o u r L g h t r o o b r a r y m a y f e a t u r e a m x f s t i s a n d e o f i e s . S c e t e y ’ e c a p t u re d o n t h e s a m e c a m e ra , v id e o c l s a r e j s t a s p r o n e a s s t i s t o s u e r f o m o b e m s s u c h a s i c o r r e c t e x p o s u e o r c o lo u r c a s ts . e e d , o u r s ta r t e o f i e l k s s g h t ly c o d a n d t h e c l s v r a n t l y c o r e d t te r f y l a c k s w e ll s a t u r a t e d c o r s . L g h t r m s p r i a r i d e s i g n e d o p o c e s s r a w p h o t o s , b u t it c a n e a k t h e c o o u a n d o n e s o f v i d e o c l p s o c o r re c t c o lo u r a n d o n a l p r o b l e m s . Yo u c a n a l s o s e L g h t r o o s p e s e t e f e c t s to g r a d e a v i d e o c l p t o g iv e t a r e t o a s h o f s e p a , o r e x a m e . V e o c l s a r e a c o r e s s e d s e r ie s o f s t i s , s o t h e y a v e c h le s s o r m a t o n a b o u t a s c e n e ’s c o lo u s a n d t o n e s t h a n a r a w e , s o t ’s h a r d e r t o r e c o v e r m s s i g t o n a l e t a i n a c l p . e e d , y o u c a n t ta k e v d e o c s i t o t h e m o r e s o p h s t c a te d De v e lo p o d u le , b u t y o u c a n s p r u c e t h e m u p n t h e L b r a r y m o d e ’s Q c k De v e l o p o d e , a s y o u l s e e n o u r w a lk t h r o u g h …

M

Import the video clip p o r t L b r a r y e n e c t v i d e o l a p c o - l o o g 10 0

o u r M V _ � � � m o d e . o i s . I n S a r t e a r i n t h e Gr d e s a t u r a te d

.

o v v id e o d t h e v e o C e c t i s id v e w . Do u e o . Pa y t h

c l p c l p , c l c b l e e c l

BEFORE

Improve the contrast i n q u k c l p .

t o L g h t ro o c k y , t o g g l e V e o F e s . c k t o o p e n o u

o g g t h e v a s a g r e e n h m a g e n c o n t ra s t g

le o p e n id e o , c l t i t , s o t a . c s h a d o

h e Qu i c k c k t h e T e m c l ic k t h e T k A u t o T o n s , c l c k t h e

De v e lo p p p e a t e t b u t to n e t o b r ig h I n c r e a s e

a n e l. b u o n t o c o t e n it B a c k

o w a rm h e v u t e ra c u p . F r p p .

u p d e t i m o r e g b u t to n

T

h yo

L SPECIAL EFFECTS

AFTER

3

Improve the colour

You could t ry restori ng the blow n-out highlights oft he w hit e petals by clickin g the W hit e’s D ecrease W hit e C lipp in g button,bu t the compressed clip lacks most of the over-expo sed detail in t hese areas.C lick th e Incr ease V ibr ance icon to boost the str ength ofw eaker colours.

4

Use creative presets

T o adjust a clip’s colours an d t on es,click t he Saved Pr eset menu and br ow se through t he preset folders. H ere we’ve gone to Lightroom B& W Toned Presets and chosen C reamtone.Click O K to grade the clip.Experim ent w it h the other p reset effects to fin d out w hat they do. 101

Teach yourself Lightroom ADVANCED EDITING

1 2

T

h yo

L ADVANCED EDITING

A d v a n c e d Improve tones, reduce noise, apply presets and more with Lightroom’s advanced tools

10 4

Introducing the Tone Curve panel

10 6

Make Tone Curve adjustments

T ake more precise contr olover the tones in you r photographs using the pow er of Li ghtroom’s Tone C urve panel

U se the pow erfulparametic and targeted adjustmen t tools in t he Ton e C ur ve to slid e your w ay to a better photo

10 8

Sharpen up your images

G ive soft-looki ng phot o sub jects more impact w hile keeping unw anted sharpeni ng art efacts at b ay

112

Reduce noise while preserving detail

114

Make changes in the Camera Calibration panel

116

Lightroom’s powerful editing presets

Smooth out chroma and lumi nance noise in your photos w hile preservin g imp ortant image detail

M ake quick adjustments to colour and tone by choosing from a range ofcamerapr ocessing profiles in the C amera C alib rati on panel

M ake instant creative edit s to colours and ton es in p hotos for qui ck enhancements or as start in g poin ts for fur ther edit in g

103

h

Lightr oom

y o

AD VAN C ED ED ITIN G GET THE FILES HERE:


Intr oducingthe Tone Cur ve panel Take more precise control over the tones in your photographs using the pow er of Lightroom’s Tone C urve Panel en sho oti g a h gh -con

W

ast

scen e it can be a ch al en ge to capture d etailthrou gh ou t that scene’s fullton alrange.I

cam era’s m eter ng

he

od e at em pts o captur

detailin a b righ t area (such as a b ackgroun ndow )then a shaded room nto shadow .I

y be plunged

he cam era m eters to capture

etailin sh aded areas,t en the sh ot’s sun sect ons m 10 4

y blow out.

hen you

eview

a photo on yo ur cam era’s LCD you m ay not see an y d etai n the b righ er highl gh s,b yo u’ e sho oti g in aw then Ligh Develop

odu e w

ecause raw

oo

lcom e to the rescue.

es are al ays pack ed ullo

orm at on abo t a scene s ton alrange,yo can overcom e com

on exposure problem

th ease,an d restore detailto cl pp ed areas.

col ection of sl ers t at enable you to arget and

eak sp eci c tones such as

un der-exp osed shad ow s,w

ho ut aler ng

correct y ex po sed h gh gh s.W e also u sed the basic p an els Clariy sl er to tease ore

dtone detailin the shot.

Th e B asic pan elis useful and easy to u se, bu t Ligh

oo m provides an al ernative an

A s w e dem on st ated in ch apter fou

ore pow er ulw ay to ta get and

Lightroo

th g eater precision

s Develop

od ule has a

eak ton es


Lightroom Anatomy The Tone Curve tab Get to know the features of this powerful tone-tweaking tool 1 CYCLE VIEWS It’s always a good id ea to compare an edited photo with the original, especially when tinkering with the powerful Tone Curve. Click here to cycle between different before-and-after layouts. You can see that the after version is brighter and better exposed.

2

5

2 CURVE

4

Initially, the curve is a straight diagonal line, so it doesn’t make any changes to the photo’s tones until you start to bend it. The bottom left of the curve alters the darkest shadows, the middle of the curve changes the midtones, and the top-right adjusts the highlights.

3 6

3 REGIONS The Tone Curve is broken up into four tonal regions – Highlights, Lights, Darks and Shadows. The Highlights slider controls the brightest pixels, whereas the Lights slider adjusts a wider range of highlights and midtones.

1

4 RANGE PREVIEW

5 CLICK AND DRAG

6 POINT CURVE

hen you click on one of the four sliders, this light grey blob highlights which parts of the curve that particular slider is controlling. Here we can see that the Darks slider influences a wide range of shadows and midtones.

Instead of clicking and dragging a slider, you can click on part of the tone curve itself. The appropriate slider will be highlighted. If you drag the cursor upwards in the tone curve window, then the corresponding slider will move to the right.

If you click here, the sliders will vanish. You can then manually click anywhere on the curve to place a control point. You then drag the point up to lighten the tones, or down to darken them. You can place multiple control points to control the tones.

CHANGE THE SPREAD OF REGIONS


TON E CUR VE PRESETS Instead of manually dragging the Tone Curve panel’s sliders to lighten or darken specific tones, you can make quicker adjustments using the Point Curve’s dropdown preset menu [1]. By setting the menu to Strong Contrast [2], the bottom-left section of the curve will dip down [3] to

4

darken the shadows. The top-right part of the curve [4] will gently lift up to lighten the highlights. This S-shaped curve is often used to improve image contrast. You can then manually tweak the Region sliders to fine-tune the results produced by these handy Tone Curve presets.

3

1

2

ust below the Tone Curve you’ll notice three triangular-shaped handles. Between these handles are four bands of greyscale tones that indicate which tonal regions are segregated by particular handles. By default the regions are separated evenly. 0-25 covers Shadows, 25-50 covers Darks, 50-75 covers Lights and 75-100 covers Highlights. However, if you wanted the Shadows slider to influence a narrower band of shadows, drag the triangle handle left to 10. The Shadows slider will then tweak shadows, but will leave more of the midtones untouched. Click Reset to restore the region segregation handles to their default positions if you come unstuck.

105

Teach your sel fLightroom AD VAN C ED ED ITIN G GET THE FILES HERE:


Make Tone Curve adjustments U se the pow erful new parametric and targeted adjustment tools in the Tone C urve to slide your w ay to a better photo e De v e l o p o d e ’s B a s i c p a n e l s d e s i g n e d t o e lp y o u e v e a l a p o t o ’s m s s i g t o n a l e t a i b y d e p e n d e n y a rg e t i g a n d a d ju s t i g t h e H g h g h t s, S a d o w s , W t e s a n d a c k s . n a b le s y o u o l g h e n o r d a r k e n p r o b le m a t c a re a s w t h o u h a n g in g c o r re c t y e x p o s e d o n e s . h e T o n e C u r v e p a n e l h a t a s fe a tu r e d o n t h e p e v io u s s p re a d p o v d e s y o u w t h n a d t io n a l a n d e e c t iv e w a y t o t a r g e t a n d e a k s p e c i o n e s . Yo u c a n c o b i e t h e c o n o l s i n e B a s ic a n d o n u r v e p a n e l s t o o v e r c o m e a n y t o n e - r e la t e d p o b e m L g h t ro o m h a s t o n e w p o w e r u l e c h n q u e s to m a n ip u a t h e T o n e C u r v e ; p a r a m e t r c a d ju s t m e n t s l d e r s a d t h e a rg e te d a d j s t e n t to o . h e p a r a m e t r c a d u s t m e n t s l d e r s r e u s e l o r c h o o s i g p r e c is e v a l e s f o r a c c u a t e t o n a l h a n g e s , a s t e y s p t a n a g e t o f o u r d i s t c t s e c t io n s :

T

e c t a

t a c

H g h g h t s , L g h t s , D a r k s a n d S a d o w s (n d e s c e n g o r d e r o e t a rg e t e d a d s t m e n t o o l s fo r t h o s e t r c k y r ig h t n e s s ) e n a b l e s p a r ts o f y o u r i a g e w e re t h e t o n e is h a r d t o j d g e . y o u o d o p a p i n p o i n t o n t h e i a g e t o a l e r s p e c i c t o n e s i n a n a g e p r e c is e ly , t h o t h a v g t o g e s s w e t h e r i t ’s a ‘ D a r k ’ L e t ’s s e e h o w t h e s e o o s a f e c t o u r i a g e . r a ‘S a o w

Parametric adjustments O u r o e d e d u c e H g h d a r k s in t h e t h e r e c e s s e s 10 6

h ig u c l g i o f

h

g h e t h e h t s b a g e a th e

s a c o y - 3 r e a o d

re to o b r ig h t a n d t ra s t in t h e i a g 3 a n d b o o s t S a d l e b r ig h t n o w e l s c lo t h e s , e d u

s h a d o w s e w t h lo o w s b y + , s o t o a d c e Da r k s

Make basic adjustments Lo a d r c h it e c t p a n e l, d r o p t h e a le t te . e p o t o s w l b o o s t t e a n o v e r a ll c o l o u r b o

p g T e s la c o l o s t

m p c k o u r to

t o t h e e r a t g i n s t h a t t h e i

De v e l o p e s l d e r c o o u , s a re le s s a g e w t

m o d fo r a o s e t s a t u r h o u t

e . n c o o le r V b r a n a te d a c l p p

t h e B a s i c o lo u c e t o + 3 0 d b r i g th e

Targeted adjustment tool to o d a r k , s o t s o f c o n t ro l 5 . h e d d e p t h t o b y - 9

Us i g t h e o n t h e S t h e s e a re a s , t h e n t h e m o d e l s fo r e a re le ft w t h a m

t a g e t e d a d s t e a d o w s in t h e f o ld s c l c k a n d d a g d o h e a d t o d a r k e n t h e o r e n a t u r a l a n d t e x

n t to o , c l c k a n d o f t e o v e ra l s t o n o n t h e h g h g h L g h t s a n d H g h t u r e d i a g e .

d r a g u l g h e n s o n g h t s . W


BEFORE

AFTER 107

h

Lightr oom

y o

AD VAN C ED ED ITIN G GET THE FILES HERE:

Shar pen up yourimages G ive s oft-looking photo subjects more impact w hile keeping sharpening artefacts at bay et

G

g you r ph otos loo ki g pi -sharp can b e a

chal en ge for a variety of eason s.M any digi al

attern s.T soften

cam eras have a b

t-in

er that bl rs t e p oto

a l tle in an at em

t to avoid prod ci g m oir

s low -p ass ( r anti-aliasi g) fiter can also ortant detai s such as ou r fow er’s f e st gm as.

y p aci g the cam era close to a sm allsu bject (such as a ow er)y ou risk gett g a shal ow dep h o that on y a n arrow ban d o detailw n fron t of and beh

eld. T his

eans

lb e in focu s.Feat es

d this sharply focu sed zon e w

lloo

blurred. A n i age that app ears to loo k sh arp on the cam era’ sm allLCD exam

ay turn o ut to look disappo ntingly soft

hen

ed on yo ur PC’s larger sc een

Fortun ately,Ligh troo s pack ed

e d etai s in a so sharpen arou nd

s rather ap y

am ed Detailp anel

lo tools t at are esign ed to tease ou t the -loo ki g ph oto.T ese p ost-produ ct on

g tools w ork their m agic by ncreasi g the con trast he ed ges of deta s in he i age,giving them

ore

pact.H ow ever,w hen you digi aly sh arpen a ph oto using Lightroo

s sl ers you risk ex aggerat g p ct

e n oise

n sm oo h areas such as the clear blue backgrou nd n ou start g i age.Y ou can also i trod ce artefacts such as blow n- ou t high gh s,cl pp ed shad ow s and dist act g h aloes to the sharpened areas. In

he folow ng w alkthrou gh w e’lexam ne w ays t

sharpen yo ur ph otos w hile keep dem on st ate how

g artefacts at bay.W e’

e sop histicated Detailp ane len ables

yo u o estrict the sharpen

g to im po rtant areas,w hil

protect ng other sect on s f om being sharpened – and therefore m 10 8

si g artefacts.

BEFORE



AFTER

109

Teach yourself ADVANCED EDITING

1

Zoom in

O pen our T Y LR �6.dng starting image in L ightroom’s D evelop module.T o accurately assess how in -focus a photo is,you’ll need to look at it at �� % .G o to the N avigator panel and click on t he �:� opti on at t he top.You can then drag N avigator’s w hite preview box around to examin e sections of the photo and check the focus.A t this magnifi cation the flow er’s subtle textures and fin e details look slightly soft.

3

Experiment with the Amount

Lightroom w ill apply a sharpenin g amount of �� to all photos to counteract the blurr in g effect of t he camera’s low -pass fi lter. If you reduce A mount t o � y ou’ll see that the unedit ed photo looks softer,so it certainly needs some post-production sharpening.A ll the other s liders w ill be greyed out.Before w e sharpen the photo properly, w e’ll over-sharpen it to demonst rate the type of ugly artefacts t hat you’ll n eed to avoid .

110

2

Check the detail

4

Recognise artefacts

T oggle op en t he D etail panel .T his features a detai l zoom w indow that displays sections of the photo at �� % so that you can see how sharp they really are.Cli ck on the litt le crosshair icon at the top-left of the D etail panel and move the cursor over the image in the main w indow.C lick to render a �� % size view in the D etail zoom w indow .You can use this tool to check the sharpness of a photo that’s zoomed out i n t he main w indow .

D rag the A mount sli der to �� to increase the contrast around the edges of small details i n t he photo.This maximum setting makes the photo look sharper,but i t exaggerates pictur e noise.T he Radius slider increases the spread of the contrast change produced by the A mount slider.To see how it w orks,drag it up to �.N ow you can see ugly artefacts such as w hite and dark haloes clingin g to the edges of the petals.


5

Compare before and after

D rop the A mount sli der to a more subtle value of �� to reduce the strength of the visi ble ugly haloes.D rop R adius to �.� to decrease the spread of t he edge contrast change and reduce the haloes even more.To see how your sharp ened version compares w ith the original,toggle the D etail p anel on and off. A lternatively,click the Before and A fter icon at the bottom-left of the w orkspace.

7

Reduce the noise

H old dow n A lt and drag D etail dow n to ��.This low er setting reduces the presence of the noise in the sharpened areas,but it still adds impact and definition to important details such as the petal edges.Lightroom’s D etail tab also has a M asking slider.T his w orks in tandem w ith the D etails sli der to restrict t he sharpening contrast change to imp ortant areas w hile keeping nois e at bay.It pays to experiment w ith this slider w ith most images.

6

Balance detail versus noise

8

Mask out the smooth areas

T he A moun t and R adiu s s li ders have given th e detai ls in the im age more im pact,b ut t hey’ve also exaggerated picture noise.This noise is noticeable in the smooth areas such as the blue background.T he D etail tab is d esigned to get a balance betw een sharpening detail w hile keeping noise at bay.H old dow n A lt and drag D etail to �� % .A greyscale preview show s you sharp detail plus noticeable noise.

H old dow n A lt and click the M asking slider.A t a value of �,the screen w ill turn w hite.T his indicates that no maskin g is occurr in g.T he other three sharpeni ng sliders are free to alter the entire image.A s you hold dow n A lt and click and drag the sli der r ight,the black (masked)areas appear.T hese masks protect parts of the photograph from bein g sharpened.O nly the w hite areas are sharpened. 111



Reduce noise S mooth out chroma and luminance noise w hile preserving important image detail

O c a m e r h e e c h r o m a g e t s e lf

a , o r a re t a (r ’s t o n a s t

n h e p e v io u s s p r e a d w e d e m o n s t a te d h o w h e De t a il p a n e l e n a b l e s y o u t o s h a r p e n a p h o t o w k e e g n o i s e a t b a y . No i s e is a d d e d t o a p o t o e n s i g a h g h SO s e n s i t i v i t y s e t t g o n y o w h e n s h o o t i g a t g h t t h a s lo w s h u e r s p e e d o t y p e s o f n o i se – a n c e ( e y s c a le ) a n c o l o u . Lu m a n c e n o is e a p p e a rs th r o u g h o u t a l a n g e a s t n y d o s . o m a n o is e m a n i e s t y a t c h e s o f d is t ra c t i g r a i o w c o r s ,

Improve the exposure O p e n Y L R� � . d n g t h e M e t a d a ta t a b . Ra t i g o f . Z o m n t h e De v e lo p o d e t o - 6� a n d V b r a n c e t o

in t h W e u n t o , d r a g + � �

e L s e d s e e E p

b r a r a n o t h e o s u

y

112

s l d e r m o t t l o o d e e L o i se , b

is d e g , b s u l s a n u t it

s ig n e d u t n t h . o s o c e s l d e r a ls o b l

a l y n t ic e a b e i n su h s a sk y. s e c an b e c o m p a s n t a s d is t ra c t i y o u o w t o u s e to g e t a b a la n c e b w e p e s e rv i g to e m o v e c h o m e e i n o r w a lk t h

e t a i - f re e s e c t io n re d g o t h e t i a n o u

t o c h a r a c te r- a d d n g r u n e s ir a b le a s c h r o m e De t a il p a e l s No i s e e e n s m o o t h in g o u p o r ta n t i a g e d e t a i o is e w h o u t lo s in g g h

Reduce the colour noise

o d u l e . is e - i d u c i n o i s e m o r e e t o + 7 � ,

o g g e g I SO c le a r s e t B l

o p e S e e d ly . a c k s

Reduce the luminance noise h e S o o h n e s s r e q u e n c y c o o u r s e tt i g o f � � p r o d u c e s g u m n a n c e n o is e , d r a g th e d u c e s t h e l u m a n c e

c h a r e e s p e c i f a JPEG i m a g e , Lu m n a n c e n o m g r a i , s o i t o i s e . W e ’ l s h o w Re d u c t o n o o s u m a n c e o is e s m u c h e a s ie r e t a i , a s y o u l s

o re m o v e lo w s c a s e t e d e a u e n t h e r e m a i t o � � . h i s s i a g e d e t a i

I n t h e De t a i l p o l o r to � to s b a c k o � � t o re m o v e b e t w e e n e d u c i g c o r ig h t to r e d c e b e e d

a n e e t h o u o r

e l ’ s N s e Re t h e s p e c k e s e m . h e De t r b le e d a n d c le f t t o re d c

d

c t i n s e c t i o n o f c h r o m a n o i s a il t a b p r o v i d e s o lo u r s p e c k g e s p e c k g .

,

r a g e . S e i a b a la n c e . D a g i

Preserve the detail e De s m o o h e t a i . Dr a g i t o i se . h e d e f Yo u c o u d a l s o

t a il t in g o r g h t a u l t o t ry

a b e n a u t lu m t o s h a f � � p c r e a s

b le s n a n r p e n r o d u i g C

y o u o g e c e n o i se r re d c e s a n e f o n t ra s t .

t a w h e t e c

b a la i e p a i s , t iv e

n c e b e t w e e n r o te c t n g r le f t to c o p r o m s e .


AFTER

BEFORE

113



Camera Calibration M ake quick adjustments to colour and tone by choosing from a range of camera-processing profiles

M p r o t h a v h

e s e ts c h n e s . F r e s a t a o id b o o e lo o k y

n y p r o t , Pr a n g e e x a m t io n s t g o u w

d i g i a l c a m e ra s p r o v id e t h e o p p o r c e ss a p h o o g ra p h e d i a t e ly a s s i g a r a n g e o f t - in r e s e t s s u t a i t , La n s c a p e , Ne u t r a l a n d s o o n t h e lo o k o f th e c a p t u r e d p h o o s ’ c p l e , a c a m e r a ’s La n d s c a p e p r e s e t o f b e s a n d g r e e n s . e Ne u t ra l p t h e c o l o u r a n d c o n t ra s t s o t h a t y o a n t in L g h t ro o m

tu th c h . o l

n y e y c a p tu r e a s e s e o u s a n d g h t b o o s t r e s e t w u c a n g e t

Process options O p e n Pr t t h e C a m e r a w p r o c e s s n g f y o u p r e f e r to S a o w s s l e r

r a it . g a C a l b r e n g i n e , r e p la c e w t h t h

e . O p e n s t h e 2 1 2 o c e s s a n e r s .

Fine-tune the profile

114

m a g e n f t (1 6 a n d d a p y t s e t S a

u s h t i n JPEG f o r m a t , t h e n t h e r e m e r a p r e s e t s w l b e a r d e r t o a l t e r in y o u s h o o t in y o u r c a m e r a ’s r a w o r m a p e r i e n t w t h d e r e n t lo o k s q c k ly g h t ro o , c o u r te s y o f t h e p o f i e s a n d a l b r a t o n p a n e l. s p a n e l p r o v id e s y o w a r d s a d j u s t i g c o o u r a n d o n e . Yo u t h e r e s u l ts o f a p a r t c u a r p r e s e t p r o e n t h e B a s ic p a n e l

s L g t h a n s l i o u c a n u s i

t s h t e n d e e r

o f t h e s e ro o . Ho w e v e r , y o u c a n e c t iv e l y i n s in t h e C a m e r a h a s p r i g b o a r h e n e - t u n g t h e s l i e r s

Choose a profile

in L g h t ro o s De v e l o p m o d a t o n p a n e l. L g h t ro o m 5 s e s o ju m p b a c k t o t h e 2 10 p r t h e B a s ic p a n e l s H g h g h t s e Re c o v e r y a d F l L g h t s l

o c o u n e ra c t th e s l g h t S a d o w s s l e r to t h e le e s s o r a n g e , g o t o Re d P a r y o t h e l e f t ( 1 5. f y o u e u h a p t a n d c l c k a l a b e l s u c h a s Re

I f c a f e x L

t a t . o m g S t h t h e d o w s

W e ’ ll e a v e P c e s s s e e ’ r e u s i n g L ig h t r o o a m e ra La n d s c a p e m a k e s th Pr t r a i t c r e a s e s c o t ra s t w s e t t le w t h t h a t p r o f i e a s a s

t t o 2 s la t e e s k in t h o t t a r t i g

1 2( u r r s t a w - p o o k o o s t i p t .

e n t ) s o r o c e s s i o ra n g e g c o

t h a t g t o o s . . a m e r , s o w e ’

Back to Basic t , a u r o .

d r k e a t o k

a g t h e t h e s k n o n o w , o ld d o

o o

F d a a y lo o k No w c r e C a m

r k a e a e r

s h o f f in t h e s o b o o s t t h e l t t e w a s h e d s e t h e V b r a n a C a l b r a t io n

m

a s ic o o u t , c e t o p a e

p a n e l. e + 4 5 o r e g a s o i n c r e a s e 3 6 o r a s l s a n e f e c

s h in t h u b t v

a d o w s a r e d e t a i . e c o t ra s t t le c o o u r e t o o l t o t

a t t e i a g e to + 2 . b o o s t . ry .


AFTER

BEFORE

115



Powerful presets M ake instant creative edits to colours and tones in photos e w a y to d s c o v e r o r e a b o u t s l d e r s a n d p a n e ls f c t o n s t p r e s e ts . n t h e p e v io u s c h a p e o w y o u c o d u s e p r e s e ts to c o u s a n d o n e s u s i g t h e L b r a r y m o d e l . Ho w e v e r , v i d e o c l s o y a v e a c c e g e o f p r e s e t e f e c t s . W e n e d t i g r aw m n t o t h e m o r e s o p h s t c a t e d De v e lo p d e r ra n g e o f e f fe c t s to y o u r p h o t o s , a s e a d . Yo u c a n s e p e s e t s a s a s t a r t g p k s a n d t h e n f i e - t u n e t e m o c u s to m

O c o l a n a n h e a w s p o o

h o w L g h t ro o o e x p e r i e n t w r w e d e m o n s t a te d h a n g e a v d e o c l p ’ e ’s Q c k D e v e l o p s s t o a e d e s y o u c a n t a k e o d u le a n d a p p l y o l s e e o n t h i o i n t fo r a a n g e o s e th e r e s u l s .

Preview the presets O p e n T YL R . d t h e Pe s e t s p a n o ld e r s u c h a s L g h t t h e c u s o r o v e r e a c h t h a t it w l p r o d u c e

Apply a preset

n g in t h e De v e lo p o d u l e . o g e l b e o w t h e Na v i g a to r . o g g le ro o m W F e r Pe s e t s . s y p e s e t y o u l s e e a p e v ie w o f n t h e Na v ig a to r w d o

g e o p e n o e n o u o v e t e lo o

Save a custom preset O n t a r ig h t o f t a b e l t h e p r e s e t if 116

c e y o u ’v e c u n d a p p y i t e Pe s e t s p a r e s e t . Yo u c e s i re d . c k

s to m s e d o o t h e r p n e l .I n t h a n r e m o v C r e a t e .

a p e s e t h o t o s . e Ne w De e s p e c i c

BEFORE

e f c k v e a t

o a s u c h o m o n o c h r a m a t ic a l d r a g O ra n g

p p a s r o m y d e u

y a p e s e t to t h e p o t o , s i p ly B e F t e r. s i s t a n t ly c o n v e a n d a d ju s t s t h e s l d e r s in h e a r k e n t h e r e d s o f t h e d r e s s . o p t o + 7 .

c l c k a e r ts t h B W l g h t e n

p e s e t e p h o t o p a n e l t h e s k

Open your presets e c t , y o u c a t h e + c o n l p Pe s e t t r ib u t e s fr

n s a v e o n t h e w o w o m t h e

n y Pe s c u s to m p r e p o p - u p e a n d s a v e t h

c u s e t s s e t , n u . e m

t o m p r e s e ts e c t o n o f t e r ig h t - c l c k i Yo u c a n a l s o a s c u s t o m U

y o u c r e a t e w l a p p e a r in t h e U s e r Pe s e t s w d o . o r e m o v e a n y t a n d c h o o s e De l e t e f r o m t h e m a k e a d ju s t e n t s o m s c ra t c h s e r Pe s e t s .


T

e t

Produce a wide range of looks by experimenting with the options in Lightroom’s Presets panel

Custom Blue Filter preset

Yellow Filter preset

H ere’s the result produced by t he customised B lue Filter preset in our four-step w alkthrough.W e darkened the reds to darken the dress so that it stands out in contrast w ith the w hite background.W e also lightened the girl’s ski n for a less grey look.

T his pres et f il ter appl ies values that dramat icall y li ghten t he reds of the dress and t he oranges of t he subject’s sk in to produce a sm oother milky complexion.T his helps her eyes and hair to stand out from the other elements in the photo.

Cross Process 2 preset

Vignette 2 preset

T his Li ghtroom pres et m im ics a tr adit ion al d arkroom proces si ng technique by tw eaking the Ton e Cur ve and adjusti ng the H SL panel’s Saturation and Luminance sliders.W e’ll explore cross-processin g in more detail i n t he follow ing chapter.

T his pres et can be f oun d i n the L ightroom Ef fect Pr esets fol der. It l eaves the photo’s colours and t ones as they are,but adds vignetted corners and film-like grain.Presets are great for giving your digital photos an in stant retro look. 117

Teach yourself Lightroom GET CREATIVE

118

T

h yo

L GET CREATIVE

G t

Give your images an edge by applying creative special effects in Lightroom

120

Bring your landscapes to life in Lightroom

124

Get the gritty mono look

126

Try creative cross-processing

U se selective adjustmen ts and the C lari ty slid er to add p un ch and contr ast to cloudy seascapes in Lightroom

H ankerin g after the pun chy appearance of thos old-fashi oned hi gh-speed black-and-w hite pr in ts? Look n o fur ther…

Pr odu ce selecti ve shifts in colour by mi mi ckin g a classic darkr oom-pr ocessing technique i n L ightroom

128

Merge panoramas

132

Make the best of your portraits

136

Create a spot-colour effect quickly

U se Li ghtroom ’s aut omated im agemerging toolto stitch severalframes into a stunning panoramic i mage

G et your subjects looki ng their best by removing spots,softening skin and teasing out detailin the eyes

Isolate an d pr eserve a sp ecific object’s colour s in a mo no chrom e conversi on t o get t he p opu lar spot -colour effect

119

Teach your sel fLightroom G ET C RE ATIVE GET THE FILES HERE:


Br ingyour l andscapes to l if e U se selective adjustments and C larity to add punch and contrast to cloudy seascapes in Lightroom BEFORE

Tweak the colour e fo r e a d s o m e b a s a d s t m e n t s a a r o u d - 6� a n a n d g re e n s t o 120

ju ic re d e n

s t i a d t o S h a

g i ju s t V b t u r a n c e

d iv id u a e n t s o r a n c e a n t io n t o a th e c o o l

l a re a s t h e w d S t r o u d lo o k o

Enhance the land o f t h e h o e i a t io n . + 6� t o f a w n

i

a g e , a k e a g e. h e m a S t V b r a n c e b o o s t t h e b t e r la n d s c a p e

i t o e s .

o b r i g d j s t o v e r t h e s k y o r E p o s u r e to a r o c re a s e C a r i y

b a c k e n t b s e a , u n d a n d

s o m e d e a r u s h a n d p s e t h e E a + � , S a d o S t a t io n

il a i s e s

n t h e t o v e r o p t io n t o + 6� o a ro u

h e t t a d

a d la h is a o c o n d � �

n d , s re a . r re c t o n .

e le c t f y o u it . D a s t o

t p a i a g 7 � .

T

h yo

L GET CREATIVE

AFTER

3

Adjust the sky

Select a new A djustment br ush and pain t over the enti re sky.A dd mor e cont rast to t he sky by setti ng C larity t o 7� and C ontrast to ��.To remove some ofthe unw anted blue colour in g set Satur ation to -��.Fi nally,set H ighlights to -76 to retai n detaili n the sky.

4

Improve the sea

T he fin alarea to adjust i s the sea.Pick the G raduated Filter tool and click and dr ag the filter from the bo tt om ofthe i mage upw ards untilt he centre line i s aligned w ith the hori zon i n t he image.Set T emperature to �7,C ontrast t o �� , H ighlights to ��,Shadow s to -�� and C larit y to 7�. 121

NEW

LEARN PHOTOGRAPHY FAST S ubs cribe to P hotoC lub to ins tantly acces s hund reds of photograp hy video clas s es.

4 95

! S O E D I V



Get gritty mono H ankering after the punchy appearance of old-fashioned high-speed black-and-w hite prints? T hen make your ow n… BEFORE

Increase the contrast Sa r t o o p t io n g t r ic s u b t le t y , a n s l d e r a l h 124

f f n t a t t h e k s h e r d t h e e w a y

h e B t o p e , b e e f a u p t

a s ic t a b a n d . e r e ’s n o c a u s e w e ’r e u lt c o n v e r s io o m a x i u m

c l c k o n t e e d o r a g o i g f o r n s f i e .

Boost Clarity h e B n y g r it Ps

a c k & W a n c y c o lo ra t h e r t h a h t h e o n

h i t u n t ra s t

O n e c h t h e s t r a r i y s l d e r s a e t e y o n y a r e fa c ts

a r a c t e r is t ic o f g r e a t b o n g d e l e a t io n o f o b d o e s p e r f e c t ly . P s h u c a n p u s h th e S a d o e x p o s e d n o w l b e

l a c k e c t s t u p w s s m a s

a n d w ,

c h t o m a x d e r u p k e d b y

t e p L g h i m u m t o m h e g

h o t t ro o . a x r a in

o s i s

i

t th e u m e f e c t

T

h yo

L GET CREATIVE

AFTER

3

Add a vignette

Sw it ch to t he Effects tab and apply a vignett e.Push the Feather slider up t o maxim um t o blend t he vignette subtly.M ove the M idpoi nt slider dow n to mini mum so that the effect begins almost from the cent re of the i mage.U se th e R ound ness slider to contr olthe shape oft he vignette.

4

Throw in some grain

Ift he C larit y and Shadow s setti ngs have created any smallar tefacts or halo effects,t he G rai n effect w ill cover t hem up.L ightr oom’s grain is very r ealisti c,but you may have to experi ment w ith t he A mount ,Size and R oughn ess slid ers to get a look you like. 125



Try creative cross-processing P roduce selective shifts in colour by mimicking a classic darkroom processing technique e te r m c r o s s - p o c e s s i g re fe r s o a d e v e lo p e c h n q u e u s e d n p r e - d ig i a l c h e m c a l d a r k r o o m s . t v o v e d d e l e r a te ly d e v e o p g p r i t e g a t iv e s i g c h e m c a ls t h a t w e r e d e s i g n e d f o r s e w t h l e f i m ( r v i s a v e r s a ). e u s e o f t e s e i n c o r re c t c h e m c a l e s u l e d n a s h t in c o l o u r a n d a n c r e a s e i n c o t ra s t . a r k r o o m e c h n q u e c r e a e d g r ea t s y l s e d a n d e y e - c a tc h i a g e s . o s s - p o c e s s e d b e s o f e n t o o k o n a g r e e n h u e f o r x a m p le , h i e th e s h a d o w s m g h t fe a tu r e a h in t o f m a g e n t a s e d t i g p r o c e s s i s s t i l a r n o , e s p e c i a l y w t h e a r t, a s h o n a n d s t o c k o t o g a p e r s . n t h e d a y s o f t r a d t io n a l a r k r o o m t h e r e s u l t s c o u d b e a b t h i t o r m s s , o y o u h a d o e x p e r i e n t to g e t th e d e s i e d s h i s in c o lo u n d t o n e . u t L g h o o s C o lo r p a n e l e n a b le s y o u o t w e a k n d a d s t v i d u a l c o lo u r c h a n e ls to r e p l c a te a l o s t a n y h e m c a l c o m b i a t o n y o u m g h t d e s i e . W e ’ l s h o w y o u t h is , s h o w t o u s e t h e Gr a d u a t e d F t e r t o t e a s e o u t m r e d e t a i h i s c e a t v e p o c e s s e le v a te s a s ta n d a rd p h o t o t o a m o r e t e r e s t i g l e v e

T

s r d e

t s a a c

Reveal colour and detail a S t t h e D a g t h a n d d e 126

o r t T s ic p a n H g h e S a d a il n t

YL R � . e l, s e t T g h t s s l o s s l h e u n d e

g i t o e m e r a e r t o - � e r r ig h t r - e x p o s

t h e De t r e to 6t o c l t o + 6� e d h u l

v e l 6 a w t o o f

o p m o d e . � � fo r a c o o a c k r ig h t e re v e a l o r e th e b o a t .

BEFORE

Adjust the Presence n t e r r d c o

h lo o k . e t a i s . o u

n t t h e a s h o f c o F t e r t l S t C a r i y

h e Pe s e p e b b l e s lo u . h c o . S t o + �

n c e s e c t io n , p o p o t . Dr o p e s k y o o k s b t E p s u r e to t o t e a s e o t f

r a g C a r i y t o + V b r a n c e t o a n d , s o c l ic k t h - 6 . s t C e d e t a il n t h e

� 6 t o � o r e G a t ra s c l o u

m a k e a s u b t le r d u a te d t t o + s .

T

h yo

L GET CREATIVE

AFTER

3

Draw a gradient

D rag the cursor d ow n to d raw a gradient t hat overlaps the sky and the top section oft he boat’s cabin.T his gradated tonaladjustment w illgent ly d arken t he sky and in crease it s cont rast.Tease out m ore colour in form ation by dragging the Saturation slider to 7�.Press M .

4

Cross-process the colours

In t he C olor panelclick t he B lue chann el.Set the B lue channel’s H ue t o -� 8 t o give t he blues th e classic gr een tin t associated w ith cross-processing.D rop t he Saturation t o a more subtle -��.C lick the R eds and set H ue to +�� to add a hint oforange to the red paintw ork oft he boat. 127



Create a panorama U se Lightroom’s M erge P anorama command to combine several frames g h t r o o m s M e r g e Pn o a m a c o m a n d s t c h e s s e v e a l r iz o t a l r v e r t ic a l f ra m e s t o g e t h e r t c r e a te a p a n o r a m c ra w e – p e r fe c t o r t o s e t i e s w e n y o r le n s c a n ’ t t e v e r y t h g i o r if y o u a n t to p a c k i n e x t ra d e t a i W h e n s h o o n g h e f ra m e s fo r a p a n o a m a , u s e a t r p o o k e e p t h e c a m e ra p o s i o n x e d a n d a k e s u r e th a t th e p a n g m o t io n e m a i s p e r fe c t y le v e l b y c h e c k i n g t h e o r iz o n a s y o u p a n ( s p r it e v e l c o m e s in a n d y e r e ) S o o t w t h y o r c a m e r a n v e r t ic a l o r i e n t a t o n o r e c o r d h e m a x i u m a m o u n t o f d e t a , a n d a l o w o r a g e n e r o u s o v e r la p b e t e e n e a c h s e g m e n t . L g h t ro o s M e r g e Pn o a m a c o m a n d o f fe r s t h r e e Po j e c t i o n o d e s t h a t s t c h t h e a m e s in e r e n t w a y s . S h e r ic a l a p s t e f a m e s a s if o n t h e i s i e o f a s p h e r e . t ’s i d e a l o r v e r y w d e a n o r a m a s , o r o e s t h a t h a v e s e v e r a l o w s t o t h e m . P s p e c t iv e m a p s t h e s e g m e n s a s if h e y e r n a f l a t s u r f a c e , k e e p g l e s s t r a i g h t . s s u c h , t ’s g o f o r a rc h t e c t r a l r c i y s c e e s . t t c a n e a d t o e x t re m d i s o r t o n a n d a r p i g a t h e e d g e s , s o c h e c k t h e m b e f o r a p y i n g . y l r ic a l a p s t e f a m e s a s if t h e y a r e o n t h e s i e o f a c y l d e . t ’s i e a l o r w e p a n o r a m a s b e c a u s e s t o r t io n s m a l, a n d v e r t c a l e s s t a y s t r a ig h t .

L

Start Merge Panorama Fr s t, / C t r c l c k t o s e l e c t a ll t h e f ra n t o y o u r p a n o a m a , t h e n g o o t h e De v e s c r o ll o w n t o t h e Le n s C o r r e c t io n p a e l , c l c E a e P f i e C r r e c t i s . Ne x t , t o b e g i n t h e Po t o > Po t o M e r g e > P o r a m a , o r r ig h t - c l c k c h o o s e Po t o m e r g e , o r s p ly p r e ss C d / C 128

B EFO R E

B EFO R E

Choose a projection m e s t o s t it lo p o d u le k Po f i e a n e r g e , s e l t h e i m a g e s + M

c h , e c t a n

h e r e a re t h re e S h e r ic a l, y l i o u t th e a m e s in a d f o n t h e s i e o f a s p f a c y l e r , a n d Pr s t h e a c h . W e ’v e u s e d

p r o je c t o n o d e s t r i c a l a n d Pr s p e c t e r e n t w a y . S h e r ic h e r e , y l r ic a l a s p e c t iv e a s i f a c e d y l d r ic a l e re .

o c h o o s e f o m iv e . E c h m a p a l p la c e s t h e m a s if o n t h e s i f la t . E p e r i e n

T

L

h yo

GET CREATIVE AFTER


BEFORE

3

BEFORE

Auto Crop messy edges

T ick the A uto C rop check box to automatically remove any m essy edges to give you a ti dy r ectangular im age.It’s non -destr uct ive and can be changed later w it h Li ghtroom’s C rop tool.T ry unchecking th e box just to see w hat’s bein g cropp ed off.W it h Perspective Pr ojection m ode here,you can see the extreme distortion at the edges.

BEFORE

4

BEFORE

BEFORE

Enhance the panorama

W hen you’re happy w ith t he settings,click M erge. T he panorama w illshow up alongside t he ori ginals w it h t he suffix Pano.It’s a D N G raw file,so you can process it like any ot her r aw file.Take it in to t he D evelop m odule to make any changes you like.H ere w e’ve boosted t he colour s and added a gradient to darken the sky. 129



Produce detail-rich HDR panoramas U se Lightroom’s tw o M erge commands in combination to make a high dynamic range panorama

I p a L t h c a

e r e m n o r a m a k e y o u e s c e n e m e r a o r

f y o u a n t t o c r e a t e d e t a i - r i c h a n a m c H D Rs , o o f L g h t ro o s n e w e s t fe a t u r e s – HDR M e r g e a n d M e r g e Pn o a m a – a k e th e p o c e ss q u ic k a n d e a s y, p r o d c i g i a g e s t h a t p a c k n t h e d e ta i a i n i n g n a t u r a l a n d r e a s t ic . S t i g f o r HDR s r e q u e s a t r ip o d a n d s o e b a s i c e x p o s u r e c o n t r o l o u ld w h a n o a l p a n o r a a , y o u n e e d o s h o o t i n o v e r la p p i n g s e g m e n s ( e a l y t h a v e r t c a l ie n t a t o n . t a t h e r t a n s h o o t i g a s i g le f a m

o r e x p c a m p a n

e a c h s e g m e n t ,y o u o s u e v a lu e s . e e a e ra u p o r b r a c k e te d o r a a h a s f v e s e g m W h e n t c o m e s to c o t h e t h r e e f a m e s f o r e a c e n y o u c o m b i e a ll t h e v e n s e t u p h e m e rg in g y o u c a n g e t o n t h o t h

Merge an HDR o c e x p o o r s o e x p t h e n r ig h p r e ss C o u n t 130

r e a t e a s u r e s o s u r e s t - c l c k d / C o f x a

n H DR fo r e a c h fo r t h e t h e m a + H . Un n y m o v

a n o r a m a y o l e e s e g m e n t . d / C f ir st s e g m e n t to s e l n d c o o s e Po t o M c h e c k A u t o T o n e , c e m e n t , h e n c l c k M

e e d t h re e f a m e s ta k e n a t d i f e re n s ie s t a y t o d o s is to s e t y o u e x p o s u e s . S f o r e x a m p le , f y o e n t s, y o u l e n d u p h � s h o s . m b in in g h e i a g e s , s t y o u e rg e h s e g m e n t i o a s i g l e H DR a g e , e H D Rs t o a k e a p a n o a m a . Yo u c a n p o c e s s to r u n n t h e b a c k g r o u n d s o e r ta s k s w e y o u a i t f o r t h e H D Rs .

Run in the background d a ra n g e o + c l c k t h e t h r e e e c t t h e m a l e r g e > H DR ( h o o s e a De g h o s t e rg e .

e r e ’s n e . Yo u s a m e c o m c t h e f ra m e S i ft + H t o h e t o p - le f t . t i

h e s e le t r a t t

o

e e d t o e n t e r t e c a n s i p ly u s e a k a n d in t h e b a ck g ro u s fo r th e n e x t se g m m e r g e (o u l s e e t Re p e a t f o r t h e r e s t

H DR s e t t e y b o a rd s h o n d . d / C e n t , h e n p r h e p r o g r e s s o f t h e s e g m

g s e v e r tc u t + c l e ss C b a r a p e n t s .

r y o r u n c k t d / p e a r

T

h yo

L GET CREATIVE

BEFORE

3

Stitch a panorama

O nce allthe H D R s have been created,it ’s ti me to put them together to make the panorama.First,filter out the H D Rs:in Library G rid view,click Text in t he Filter bar and type ‘H D R’.Select allthe H D Rs,then press Cm d/C trl+M to open the M erge Panorama box.Ch oose a Projecti on (C ylin dr icalher e),then click M erge.

4

Tease out the details

T ake the resulti ng panorama i nto the D evelop m odule. U se the Basic panelslid ers to revealdetaili n t he highlights and shadow s,and in crease C lari ty to get the H D R look.N ext,tease out detailw ith the A djustment br ush.G rab the br ush from the toolbar,paint over an area,then use the slid ers to change it as desir ed. 131

h

Lightr oom

y o

G ET C RE ATIVE GET THE FILES HERE:


Make the best ofyourpor tr aits G et your subjects looking their best by removing spots, softening skin and teasing out detail in the eyes e art of etou chi g a po rt ait can som eti es be

T

a co

en tiou s su bject,esp ecialy

yo u al er the

subject’s app earance too radicaly.H ow ever,peop are h app y to al er the r ow n oo k b efore a ph oto

shoo t by ap plying m ake-up o con cealspots and create the app earance o healthy-loo ki g skin. I n the studio a bu st of rect key

gh t can

atten

an d create a m ore you

to p t f ters (su ch as the en s to add a glow

t a p rtrait sub ect’s w ri kles

ul oo k. Pho ograph ers are also free ro-m st f ter ov er their cam era’

o the su bject’s skin an d to give it

sm oo her,m ore f at er ng com plexion ut d espi e the best ef orts of the su bject and the ph otograph er du ring the shoo ,som e post-prod uction retou ch

g is al ost al ays requ ed o create a perfect

po rt ai .I

e su bject of yo ur p ort ait has h as a b ad

day o r they have a spo ,then

hey

ai

lb e less than hap py

th the ph otograph c result. Fortun ately,Ligh troo m

as allthe too s you

eed

elp get you r po rt ait s bject loo king the r best w tho am aticaly al eri g their appearance.I n th s w alkth ou gh e’ld em on st ate how

o spruce up a port ait by rem oving

blem shes su ch as spo s and usi g brush st ok es to creat a sm oother com plexion.W e’lalso dem on st ate how cou

eract

-cam era problem s w

so that skin loo ks n aturali stead o

h w hite balan ce set

the str ggle for the p erfect po rt ait is the A T

s too

s packed ful of ortrait-retou ch

en able yo u o select vely

gs,

oo orange.A key too li stm en t brush g presets that

gh en un der-exp osed eyes an

tease ou t f e co ou s an d extu es in the irises,so that yo subject can m ake eye con act 132

h he view er

BEFORE

Teach yourself Lightroom GET CREATIVE

AFTER

133

Teach yourself GET CREATIVE

1

Cool down the image

Import T Y LR ��.dng in to the D evelop module.Before makin g local adjustmen ts,kick off by cooli ng dow n the w arm-looking skin tones.G o to the Basic panel and drag the T emperatur e sl id er left to a cooler �� degrees K elvin .T his produces more natural-looking skin tones.

3

Restore the highlight detail

5

Enhance the eyes

U se the N avigator to see the w atch at �:�.T he highlights aren’t cli pped,but w e’re losin g detail i n these areas.D rag the H ighlights to -�8.This darkens the highlights w ithout messing w ith other tones.W e can now see the numbers on the w atch face more clearly.

Set Si ze to 7.�.P lace an Edit pin on an eye.Paint over both eyes.T he preset Exp osure,C larity and Saturation settings brighten t he w hites,and tease out iris texture and colour,givin g the eyes more im pact.T oggle the A djustmen t brush panel on and off to s ee the difference.C lick D one.

134

2

Boost the exposure

T ake a look at t he his togram.T he phot o i s s li ghtly under-exposed.D rag Expos ure right to a value of +� .�� to give the w eak midtones a bri ghter value.T he edit ed graph w ill slide tow ards the brighter end of the histogram w indow and show a w ider,healthier spread of tones.

4

Pick a preset

6

Whiten the teeth

D rag the w indow to the eyes and click the Ad justment brus h icon.C lick t he Effect menu to see a range of presets.Select Iri s Enhance.T his preset pushes Exposure up to +� .�� to lighten the eyes.It also sets C lari ty to �� to increase midtone contrast,and boosts Saturation to �� .

T he shad ed t eeth l ook a bit dul l.For li ghter,w hit er teeth,click the A djustment brus h panel’s Ef fect menu and choose T eeth W hitening.T his drops the Saturation slider to -6�,w hich removes stains more quickly than a dentist can! R educe Size to �.�.S et the N avigator to �:� for a clos er look.

Teach yourself GET CREATIVE

7

Use a mask

8

Fine-tune the adjustment

T o help the A djust ment br ush to t arget the teeth,t ick the A uto M ask icon.T his tool analyses the contrast and colour of the teeth,and attempts to avoid alteri ng adjacent edges such as the lips.T ick Show Selected M ask O verlay to see w hich areas w ill be lightened.Paint over the teeth.

C lear Show Selected M ask O verlay.T he A uto M ask tool helps to stop the brush from straying too far over the lips,although there still may be some lip desaturation. T o res tore c olour to t hem t ick the E rase b utton .T he br ush ti p w ill change to a minus icon.Paint to restore the lip colour.

9

10

Soften the skin

12

Take away the scar

Choose a new preset

O ur s ubject’s s kin suffers from shiny specular highlights caused by the flash reflecting from sw eat. For smoother,less shiny skin,click N ew in the A djustment brush panel.Choose the Soften Skin preset.T his drops the C larity sl ider to -�� to decrease the midtone contrast.

11

Remove the spots

C lick the Spot R emoval tool,set it to H eal,and zoom in to �:�.Set Si ze to �� and Feather to 87. C lick the spot overlapping her lip to t arget it.A second overlay automatically samples a clear patch of skin and places it on the spot.D rag the overlays to fi ne-tune their positions.

Place an E dit pin on the face and pain t over the shiny spots.T he -�� C larity value acts like pow der puff and r educes the shin e.If you paint over gently contrasting lines and w rin kles they become less defined, w hich helps to create a more youthful compl exion.

H old dow n the space bar to summon the H and tool and drag to t he scar.Set the zoom to �:�. Set Size to 6�.Paint along the length of the scar to cover it up.T he Spot R emoval tool automatically samples a patch of clear s kin and grafts i t over the unw anted scar. 135



Create a spot colour effect Isolate and preserve a specific object’s colours in a monochrome conversion e s t r k i n g w a y t o d a w e o p l e ’s e y e t o a s p e c i s u e c t in a p t o is to p r e s e r v e t h a t o b e c t ’ c o l o u r o r m a t io n e c o n v e r t i g t h e r e s t o f h e p h o o t o m o n o c h o m e . h is s p o t - co lo u r e s c o n s i e r e d b y s o e t o b e a b t t a c k y , b u t f o r o t h e r s i t ’s a o p a r c r e a t iv e p o c e s s i g t e c h n q u e t h a t ’s f n o d u g e . F r e x a m p l e , y o u c a n ’ t a n d e r t h r o u g h a Lo n d o n s t e e t t h o t s e e i g s p o t - c o o u r p o s t c a r s t a t e a t u r e ic o n c r e b u s e s o r p h o n e b o x e s a g a in s t a b la c k - a n d - w h i e b a c k d r o p . n c h a p e r s ix e u s e d t h e H SL p a n e l o a r g e t a n d e a k a l a n d s c a p e ’s d f e re n t c o r s t r e n g t h (S t r a t ) a n d r i g h t n e s s (L a n c e ) v a l e s . e H SL a n e l ’ s c o s l d e r s e n a b le d u s t o e n h a n c e a d r ab s u n s e t h o r e s a t a te d e d s a n d o a n g e s , e l g h t e n i g t h e t o n e s o f t h e a n s c a p e s u e r - e x p o s e d g r e e n s . n t h is c r e a t v e a lk t h r o u g h e ’ l s e t h e s a m e H SL c o t r s t o s e e c t i v e e s a t u r a te a ll t h e c o o u s in o u r s ta r t g i a g e e x c e p t fo r t b o y ’s y e o w a i c o a t . s fa s t s l e r - b a s e d t e c h n q u e s a v e y o u t h e t i e a n d h a s s le o f h a v i g to p a i t c o lo u r b a c k i

O

Desaturate the leaves L a d Y L R6 r ig h t - c l c k a p a o n y d s p a y t h e c u r t h e H SL a n e l . c k O r a n g e s l e r t o 136

g i n t o n e l a n d r e n t ly a t h e S � to d e

t h e De v e l t ic k S o M c t iv e p a n e l . t u r a t i n a b s a t u r a te t h e

p o d e , c k e l . Dr le a v e

BEFORE e c t

d

h e s

Remove the blues e . I f y o L g h t ro o m t o t o g g l e o p e n a g t h e Re d a n s .

D a g t h e Gr l d e s a t u r t h e s e a r e a s t o g r e y c i c u l a r a rg e t e d A s a m p le th e c o o u r

e e n a n d q u a s l e r s le f t t o a te t h e c o o u r s n t h e g r a s s a s c a l e . I n s t e a d f r a g g i n g s l d j u s t m e n t ic o n , t h e n c l c k t a n d d a g d o w n t o d e s a tu r a te

n d e r h e th

� to o . c o n v e r s , c l c k je a n s t e b u e s

t t h e o .

T

h yo

L GET CREATIVE

AFTER

3

Desaturate the skin

T here’s sti lla hin t of skin t one remain in g,so use the T argeted A djustment toolt o sample and desatur ate the skin,or drag the Pur ple and M agenta sliders dow n t o -�� . T he only r emain in g colour is yellow .B oost t he Yellow slid er to + 6� to m ake the child’s raincoat look mu ch more vi brant .

4

Tidy up

You ’lln ot ice t hat t here ar e also some yellow s in th e backgroun d bu shes.T o rem ove yellow from these areas grab the A djustment br ush.C hoose Satur ation from t he Effect d rop-dow n menu.D rop t he Saturation slider to -�� . C lear A uto M ask.Set Flow and D ensity to ��. 137

Teach yourself Lightroom PRINT FROM LIGHTROOM

138

T

L

h yo

PRINT FROM LIGHTROOM

P t L

Produce perfect prints of your photographs using Lightroom’s Print module

140

Soft proof your images

142

Introducing the Print module

14 4

Create a custom print layout

Identi fy and corr ect unp ri ntable colour s so th at th e pr in ted ver sion looks sim ilar t o w hat you see on screen

Set up your page size and orientation and u se the L ayout St yle panelto create a cont act sheet ofyou r photographs

146

Watermark your images

U se the Pr in t m odu le’s Page panel to protect your photos by addi ng w atermarks or an Ident it y P late to each i mage

14 8

Manage your printer’s colours

G et pr in ted colours looking their best usin g Colour Profiles to in dicate w hich pr in ter, paper an d i nk should be used

U se the Template brow ser to create a range ofpr in t layouts,or create one from scratch by modi fyi ng cells

139

h

Lightr oom

y o

P R IN T FR O M L IG H T R O O M GET THE FILES HERE:


Sof t pr oof yourimages Identify and correct unprintable colours so that your printed photo looks similar to w hat you see on the screen n chap er fve w e processed the colou s and on es

I

n a land scape ph otograph

o reveal

ore detai

RG

Lightroo

s Develop

colou s t at a pri em

o fallw

od ule h as a han dy So t P oo ng y he ou -of-gam ut

er can’t ep od ce,so that you can ad n

e pri

st

able rang e.To dem on st ate soft

proofi g,w e’lu se the b righ t and colou rful processed v ersion

er m ay struggle to reprodu ce the p ocessed

e’s colour accurately.T

s is because co

er dis ays

on s of colou s by

xing eds,greens an d blues

)together,w hi e m ost do

est c printers com bine cyan,

agenta,black and yel ow

CM

)to create a nar ow er ange

of colou s.Co ou rs t at can’t be p ri ted are refer ed o as ou t of gam ut’colou s.Th e i age on y ou r 140

g to vibran t colou rs t at can

od e that s designed o help you den

er processi g a ph oto to loo

version of he p ho o.

produ ce m

ated ,lead

paratvely d ab o n p aper.

n the i age an d create m ore attractive v brant-

a p ri t t at loo ks less brigh t and vibran t t an the d gital

ct

oo k co

oo ki g co ou s.A

goo d o n screen,it can then be frustrat g to en d u p w th

Yo ur pri

brigh tly

on

or is also

of ou r TY LR �.dn g start g i age that w e created in the ad ated Fi ter tutorial n c ap ter five Lightroo m uses the sRG B (stand ard RG B) colou r space that’s design ed to display co

rs on screen .A ter selective

adj st g p ob em at c colou s in an sRG B colou r space,w e’ dem on st ate how

o force Lightroom

o use a nar ow er

pri er-frien dly colou r space – A do be RG B ( � 8)

ore

Teach yourself PRINT FROM LIGHTROOM

1

Examine the colour mix

Load the processed T Y LR ��.dng image in to the D evelop module.A s you move the cursor around t he image you’ll see that t he RG B values below the histogram change.T he sampled dark blue sky in our screen grab is created by a mix of �8.�% Red,��.7% G reen and ��.�% Blue,for example.

3

Activate the gamut warning

5

Desaturate select areas

T o d is cover w hich colour s w on’t pr in t corr ectly,cli ck the D estination G amut W arning icon at the top-right of the histogram w indow.A ny unprintable colours w ill turn red.H ere you can see that the darker blue pixels and s ome of the greens and yell ow s are out of gamut.

C lick the Saturation section of the H SL panel,and select t he T argeted A djustment tool i con.Cl ick the sky’s red patch and drag dow nw ards to desaturate the colour. T he B lue s li der w il l sli de l eft and the p atches w il l van is h. Sample and desaturate the patches in the grass.

2

See a Proof Preview

T o get a b etter id ea of h ow the p hoto w il l l ook w hen it’s pri nted,click the Soft Proofing button.The w hite backdrop represents the paper border around t he print.T he area below the histogram show s specific numerical values for each colour R G B colour chann el,rather than a percentage.

4

Create a Proof Copy

6

Change the colour profile

You may w ant a version of t he image to be seen online,as w ell as a version that’s suit able for prin t. C lick C reate Proof C opy.You’ll now have tw o versions of the photo in the Filmst ri p.T o desaturate the copy’s unpr in table blues w ithout changing the other colours,go to the H SL t ab.

A ltern atively,you can change the photo’s colour profi le menu from the default sR G B (standard RG B)to the prin t-friendly colour space of A dobe RG B (�� 8).T his forces the Proof Preview ’s colours to confor m to a print able range w ithout t he need to make selective adjustmen ts. 141

h

Lightr oom

y o



Intr oducingthe Pr int modul e S et up your page size and orientation and use the Layout Style panel to create a contact sheet of your photographs he m ajori y o

T

Lightroom

his boo k o n using

o m ake the best of

yo ur d gi alp ho os h as dealt w ays to o ganise yo r assets in the

Libra y m od ule and then p ocess hem Develop m odu e.M ost peop e w ore t other

n the

lspend

e in these t o m odu es than n he ve.Ho

ever,m any Lightroom user

lw an t to sha e their skil

ye

ted p otos

digi aly as stock ph otos o r on socialm edi ebsi es and app s.W e’lcover these sh ar ng op tion s in the last chap ter 142

Others w

lw ant to pri t t eir ph otos t

place in a f am e or in a ph ysicalph oto albu an d w e’lloo k at this n the n ext few pages. On

he p eviou s spread w e tou ched o n the

dif eren ce betw een processi g a p ho o or on -screen display an d hard copy print.On ce yo

ve used the sof -p oo

g too lo r chan ged

di eren t sized p ri s of the sam e ph oto w a few cl cks.A ernatively,yo u can an ge o

ri t a

en ticaly sized p otos as a co tact

sheet.T he an otat on s on the fol ow ng p age li

od uce y ou o the k ey tools and pan el

n the Pr nt m odu e.W e’lthen m ove on he ol ow ng pages to d em on st ate ho w

the colour profie to en su e p ri table co ou s,

create custom sed layo ts that su t yo

yo

speci c p ri ti g requi em en s.So

e ready o take the p ho o or p ho os)

the Pr t In

od ule to d ecide o n a layou

he Print m od ule you can print the p ho

ful -size or use tem

ate layo ts to creat

you

ant to pu bl sh on

or u si g trad tion alpri

et er

he w eb,via an em ai s,w e’

key sett gs and oo s you

eveal allth

eed to u se.

Teach yourself Lightroom PRINT FROM LIGHTROOM

Lightroom Anatomy The Print module Get to know the key features of the Print module 1 PREVIEW In the Print module, the usual Navigator is replaced by a preview of the cells in the currently selected template. This tool helps you to understand each template’s layout at a gla nce, and choose one that suits your printing requirements.

5 1 6

2 TEMPLATE BROWSER 2

Click here to preview and select from a wide range of layouts. You can print different sized versions of a selected photo with a range of aspect ratios. Here we have one photo in a 5x7 aspect ratio, with four images at 3.5x2.5.

3

3 PAGES

4

If you select more than one photo in the Filmstrip, each one will be placed in the template layout on a page of its own. You can click this icon to jump to the first page and use the arrows to scroll through the others.

4 SELECT PHOTOS

5 LAYOUT STYLE

6 IMAGE SETTINGS

You can use this drop-down menu to add selected Filmstrip photos to the current template layout. Alternatively, you can choose to add Flagged Photos or even All Filmstrip Photos to a template.

Click this panel to print a single image or a contact sheet featuring multiple identically sized photos. An appropriate layout style will be selected as you browse through presets in the Template browser.

Use this panel to enlarge the image to fill the cell that it sits in. Use Rotate to Fit to make a portrait-oriented photo fill a landscape cell. You can also add borders to each cell for a classic print look.

MANAGE YOUR PANELS


RULERS,GUIDES & GRIDS Many print services still uses inches as the default unit of measurement, so you can click here [1] to display your photos using this option (or choose millimetres if you prefer). hen creating custom layouts it’s worth clicking here [2] to turn on non-printable extras such as Rulers.

hen creating a Picture Package of different sized photos, you can label each cell with the image dimensions by clicking here [3]. To keep images aligned, it is worth clicking here [4] and choosing Cells (or alternatively you can make them snap to the Page grid).

2

1

3

4

The Print module is packed full of panels, so you’ll need to do lots of scrolling if they are all open. To keep your workspace less cluttered, right-click a panel and choose Solo Mode from the popup menu. You can then see one panel at a time and automatically collapse the others with a click. ith seven modules to explore, it’s worth mastering the keyboard shortcuts that can summon each module with a few taps. The seven modules can be summoned with sensibly-numbered keyboard shortcuts that relate to the order in which they appear at the top of the workspace. Use Cmd/ Ctrl+Alt+1 to access the Library module, Cmd/Ctrl+Alt+2 for the Develop module, and so on.

143

h

Lightr oom

y o



Cr eate acustom pr int l ayout U se the Template brow ser to create a range of print layouts,or create one from scratch by modifying cells he Pri t

T ri ts

od ule’s Tem plate brow ser s packed

th p eset tem plates that enab e yo u o du pl cat and

esize a ph oto (or a select on of

that you can p od ce a Pict

ages)so

e Package con ai

th a ran ge o sizes.Y ou can also pri t a col ection of

ph otos in he Fi on e of Ligh troo

strip as a series of thum bn ai s,cou rtesy of s Contact hee t presets.I n the Layo ut Styl

pan elyo u also h ave the op hich s han dy

yo u

on o create a Custom Layou

eed o p ri t a rang e of di eren t s zes

s layo t em

ates place yo r

T hese cel s can be m an ual y d agged 144

Yo u can also

an ual y esize i dividu alcel s an d set t

en closed ph oto to zoo m

o filthe cello r shri k to p eserve

he original com po si on of he cel s to su t a p In

his w alkthrou gh w e’lsho w you ho w

pan elto create a custom au

age.You can also rotat

to’s asp ect ratio.

otos in ce s.

o an y p osi on on

o u se the Cel

em plate f om scratch an d produ ce

qu e p ri t layou t con ai

gd

eren -sized an d shap ed

prints.You can save your custom sed layout as a new em plate so that you can p ri t it at any

that aren t avai able in the T em plate b ow ser Lightroo

page so y ou can easi y chan ge the layou t of a Picture Package.

e in the future

thou t avi g to ti ker w th the size,shap e and po si on of the ce s in the layo t.


1

Set up the page

T oggle op en the C ells panel and cli ck C lear Layout to create a blank p age.Cl ick t he Page Setup butt on on t he bottom left of the w orkspace.C lick the landscape orientation icon and select a suit able paper size,such as A �.Leave Scale at �� % .C l i ck O K .

3

Change the units

5

Adjust the size manually

O ur �x7 print w ill fill a standard picture frame.You may also w ant to prin t passport-sized photos on the same sheet.If so,then go to R ulers,G rid & G uides and set Ruler U nits to M illimeters.G o to C ells and click the pop-up arrow.C hoose Edit.

Set the U nit s back to Inches.C lick t o add a �.�x�.� sized cell to the p age.D rag the cell’s hand les t o make it f ill the layout’s empty space.T his s hape doesn’t match the original composition.H old dow n C md/C trl and drag the cell to fine-tune the position of the enclosed photo.

2

Add the cells

Select the T Y LR �7.dng starting image in the Filmstrip. T he C ells panel cont ain s icon s t hat cr eate cells w it h specific dimensions .C lick the arrow to the right of each button to access other s hapes and sizes.C hoose �x7 to create a large prin t.T ick Z oom to Fill in t he Image Settings panel.

4

Create a custom size

6

Save your template

In the N ew C ustom Size w indow,type dimensions of ��x��mm.C lick A dd.T his creates a cell w ith standard passpor t photo dimensi ons.O nce you’ve created your custom passport size,a ��x�� button w ill appear.C lick it to add more passport pictures to your layout.D rag them into position.

C lear Z oom to Fill in the Image Settings panel to make the entire photo fit inside each cell.To save the custom layout as a template,click the + icon in the Template brow ser.N ame the template and cli ck C reate.You can then summon it w ith a click in the Template brow ser. 145

Teach your sel fLightroom P R IN T FR O M L IG H T R O O M GET THE FILES HERE:


Watermark your images U se the Print module’s Page panel to protect your photos by adding w atermarks or an Identity Plate to each image e g a l le r ie s a n d o r t f o l io s o v d e q u c k a n e a sy w a y s to s h a re y o u r p h o t o g ra p h s , b u t y o u r o t o s a r e v e r a b le t o t h e f t o n t h e i e r n e t . y s h o o n g a p h o t o y o u a u t o m a t c a l y o n o p y r ig h t , b u t o n c e i s b e e n d o o a d e d a n d r e - p o s te d t o t h e r s i e s , o s p e c t iv e c l e n s w o n t e c e s s a r i y k o w h e p h o t o g r ap h b e lo n g s to . s m g h t e s u lt n a p h o o b e i s e d w t h o u t a n y o n e c r e d i t g o r p a y i g y o u . Yo u a y a ls o a n t to s e n d a c l e n t p ro o f p h o t o s to p e r u s e a n d o r d e r h o u t th e r is k o f th e m a k i n g u n a u t h o r is e d p r in t s s w e s a w n c h a p t e r o n e , y o u c a n d i g i a l y a s s ig n y o u r o p y r ig h t a n d c o t a c t d e t a i s to a p o t o ’s m e t a d a t a , s o t h a t

O

c o t

c

Add an Identity Plate W e ’ l o l o a te r m a rk o p e n t h e Pg e p c k Re n d e r o n c h o o s e E i t o c 146

w

o n s to a n e l e v e r u s to

o m t h e p h o n t h e y i a g m s e t

h e p r e o t o s in r ig h t . e . c k h e c o n

v io u s w a lk t h r o u g h a n d a d d o u r c u s to m a y o u . o g g l c k t h e e n t i y Pa t e b o t h e p r ev ie w n d o w a n d e n t s .

p p

c a c

s i p o r ta n t i o r m a t o n l a l a y s b e a t a g e . s h e l s p o t e n t ia l c l e n t s to c o t a c a n t to u s e th e a g e in a n y a y . M e ta d a t a e o p le c a n s t l d e c id e o i g n o e it a n d a k e r i t o f y o u r a g e . o p r o t e c t y o r p h o t o s o r e e f f e c t iv e l y , L o d u l e h a s a h a n d y Pg e p a n e l h a t e n a b e s a te r m a r k s a n d e n t i y Pa t e s t o e a c h a g a te r a rk s b y a d d n g y o u r o w n g r ap h c - b a s u s t o m s in g e x is t g t e x t . h e t r c k t o a d d i n a g e is to c re a te i o r m a t v e t e x t w h o o lo u s a n d c o m p o s i o n o f th e i a g e .

a c h e d o t h e t y o u f t h e y is u s e f u l , b u a n u n a u t h o r is e d g h t ro o s P y o u o a d d v s u a l e . Yo u c a n c r e a t e e d lo g o s o r b y g a w a te r m a rk t o t o b s c u r i g t h e

Customise the text Y u c a n c l c k t h e U s e t o i p o r t a lo g o e . x e l s . t e r a t iv e l y , t ic k t h e t e x t s u c h a s ‘ PRO O F. s e a ls o p c k a c o o u r fo r y o r c u

a g h i s t y a f s to

r a p h s o p le d o t m

c a l I e n t i t y Pa t e b t t t io n s u p p o r t s t r a n s p a r e n t t e x t o p t io n . y p e s o fr o m t h e e n . Y u c a n e x t . c k O K


3

Fine-tune the text

Set the Page panel’s O pacity slider to ��% to get a balance betw een being able to read the text and see the photo.D rag the Scale slider to 6 �% to enlarge the text so that it can’t be removed w ith a crop.A ll the photos on the page are now safe to share.

4

Place your watermark

T ick the W atermar kin g box.You can as si gn any copyright presets you created follow ing the w alkthrough in chapter one.A lternatively,click Edi t W atermark and type some text.Choose w hich corner you w ant it to appear in .C lick Save to create a new preset. 147

h

Lightr oom

y o



Manage your pr inter ’ s col our s G et printed colours looking their best using C olour P rofiles to indicate w hich printer,paper and ink should be used ei

W sed

Proo

od uced

his chapter on

si g the S oft

ng oo lto crea e a p oo preview cop y.

T his enabled us o den

y colou s that m gh

no t eprodu ce on a dom est c pr nter.W e then

e H L pan elto select vely arget and adjust the

prob em at c colou s to bri g them or gam

thin a p ri able ra ge

.W e also d em on st ated an al ernative w ay to crea

a p ri able range of colou s by chan gi g the screen -frien dl sRG B colou r space to a n ar ow er bu t

ore pr nt-com pat bl

colou r space – Ad obe RG B ( �� ).I n this w alkthrou gh w e’ con

nu e w orking w

h the proo preview copy w e created

earl er,so t’s w orth fol ow

g th s ch ap ter’s f rst

before w e m ove on o look n gitalp oto 148

alkth rou gh

ore depth at turning your

to a p erfect pri t.

Even af er si g the A do be RG B ( �� )co ou r prof e t produ ce m ore pr ntable colou s,you

ay st len d u p w

disapp oi ti g pri s.I yo u’ e pri ti g at ho o m ake sure that you r pri er is perform ts ti y so

are to ch eck the ink eve

e you n eed

g prop erly.U se n the cartri ge.

Do a test pri t to m ake su e that t e pri t ead is al gn ed Clogg ed n ozzles w

lruin a p ri ,so d o a n ozzle check

oo.U sing he ink hat the m anufacturer recom lp olon g y ou r pri ters l e an d

ends

od ce b etter resul s.

Ch eap p aper ten ds to absorb an d sp ead the i k,leadi g t ud dy-loo king p rints

h w ashed-o ut colou ,so choo se

heav yw eigh t ph oto gloss o r m att i kjet paper that’s design ed or h gh -resol Lightroo

on pri s.W e’ltalk yo u

ou gh set

gu

s Pr t Job pa elto get pri s loo king their best…


1

Choose a profile

In t he Library module,open the proof preview w e created earlier in this chapter.You can enable your printer to choose a colour profile,or enable Lightroom to take control ,as w e’ll see in a few steps.Set the Prof ile to A dobe RG B (�� 8)to make the colours prin ter-compatible.

3

Specify a resolution

5

Have Lightroom manage colours

T oggle op en the P ri nt Job p anel.L eave P ri nt Resolution s et to �� ppi.Increase Prin t Sharpening to Standard to create a print w ith more punch.Set M edia T yp e to sui t the p ri nt er’s p aper.T ick �6 B it O utp ut if your printer supports this option.

If you click Print the printer w ill use the profile to manage the photo’s colours.A ltern atively,click C ancel and enable Lightroom to manage the colours.C lick the Pri nt Job’s Prof ile drop-d ow n menu and choose one of the profiles listed,such as A dobe RG B (�� 8)or a specific printer profile.

2

Set a template

C lick the Print icon in the M odule picker.In the T empl ate brow ser choose t he (�)8 x�� temp late. In Image Settings,clear Z oom to Fil l so that you can see the enti re photo and avoid croppi ng the edges.Cl ick Page Setup and click the landscape icon to rotate the page.

4

Select a printer profile

6

Make a print adjustment

If you w ant the pri nter to manage the colours,click Printer.C hoose C olor M atching from the drop-dow n menu.Cli ck C olorSync t o access a profile.In t he Profile menu you can choose O ther Profiles and load in a profi le that came w ith your printer.Click O K and select a profile.

By clicking Perceptual you force a photo to correct out-of-gamut colours,but this may also change other colours in the print.W e‘re w orking w ith a proof preview w ith prin table colours,so click R elative.Boost B rightness to make the pri nt’s colours l ook more like the on-screen colours. 149

Teach yourself Lightroom PUBLISH YOUR IMAGES

15

T

L

h yo

PUBLISH YOUR IMAGES

P y o r

Make a photo book or upload your pictures to an online gallery or social media website

152

Publish photos with Blurb

156

Create a video slide show

160

Make a triptych from three similar pictures

T ur n a collection of im ages in to a pri nted book w it h bespoke design straight from the Li ghtroom in terface

U se the Slideshow module to present a series ofyour stills,and tu rn it in to a vid eo file to share w it h anyone

162

Publish your pictures and Collections online

16 4

Create an online photo portfolio

Export your processed pictures to social-netw ork in g sites such as Facebook,and d isplay and edit photos via Lightroom w eb

Show case your pi ctures in an i nt eracti ve gallery usi ng th e tools and tem plates in L ightroom’s W eb module

U se the P ri nt modu le to place three i mages on a sin gle page,then tur n i t i nto a bann er-style graphi c

151

h

Lightr oom

y o

PU BLISH YOU R IM AG ES GET THE FILES HERE:

B E F O R E

Publ ish photos with Book Turn a collection of images into a printed book w ith bespoke design h tho usan ds o ph otos clutteri g you r Ligh troo m Catalog

W

s l kely hat on y a sm allp ercentage w on ce in

e Lo up e vie ,w

space-saving hu

e others w

lb e seen

ore than

lb e scrol ed p ast as

bn ais.A ew of you r favouri e i ages

ay be p rinted,as w e dem on st ated in he p eviou s chapte Ou r f alch apter s allab ou t getti g yo ur be st ph otos seen, and Lightroom has four m odu es des gned o m ake that happ en.A s w el as m aki g i dividu alp ri s using the Pri t ul ple printed i ages n p ho o bo oks,cou

od

e,yo u can sh ar

esy ofthe B ook

A boo k fullof ph otographs (such as a w edding album )w ch

ore often han a d gi alco ect on n Ligh troo

because of ullo

s m ore tangible n ature.Lightroom s B ook

od ule.

lbe seen s Catalog od ule is packed

ayout tem plates you can cu stom se to p esent you r w ork in

var ety of

ays.I n his w alkthrou gh

e’ltake you

of organisi g you r bo ok s assets,presenti g t em an d even exp ort

g them

hrough

he proces

n a cu stom

o b e pri ed b y a thi d p arty w ho

ayou ld elver

the bo ok to yo ur do or.Presenti g you r digi alp otos in a ph ysicalb oo gives them a new A

ease of

er this w alkthroug h

e. e’ lloo k at t e tools that Ligh

oo

ov de s to sh are yo r ph otos digitaly.A s w ellas creat g sl ck sl show s and ani ated

eb galer es,you ld scover how

ervices plug n that w share on socialm edia. 152

lex po rt edited ph otos d

o add a Pub sh

ect y o yo ur p ho e to

AFTER



153

Teach yourself PUBLISH YOUR IMAGES

1

Create a Collection

Before adding photos to a book it helps to gather them into a C ollection.T his quality-control procedure helps you to separate the w heat from the chaff so that only your best w ork w ill make it in to the book.G o to the C ollections panel in the Library module and press the + icon.C hoose C reate Collection.G ive the C ollection a label (such as Lands cape Book C ollection).T ick the Set as Target C ollection box.C lick C reate.

3

Put them in a book

O nce you’ve gathered a collecti on of i mages together,click the Book module icon.Lightroom w ill then w ork out how many images you w ant to add to the book and prepare a layout to includ e them.In t his i nstance i t’s used a Standard Landscape layout, w ith each image resized to �� x8 in ches.You can go to V iew and click Show Info O verlay to hide the dist racting label (or press I to toggle it on or off ).

154

2

Add to the Collection

C lick on any thumbnails you w ant to add to the C ollection and press B .T his shortcut adds them to the T arget C ollection.You can also use the Painter tool to add photos to a Target C ollection (see our Smart C ollections w alkthrough in chapter one for more details on t his techni que).C hoose eight of our lands cape-themed photos for your C ollection.C lick the Landscape B ook C ollection label to see your collected images.

4

Alter the book settings

You can change the default image size and other attributes by going to the Book Settings panel.By d efault it w ill export to Blurb,a third-party print company.You can change the Book drop-dow n menu to produce a PD F or JPEG of your layout if you w ant to pr int the book elsew here.You can also change the Size drop-dow n menu to Large landscape to create a book w ith ��x��inch images.C lick the C hange Size and L ayout button.


5

Change the views

W e’re looking at the book in the M ulti-Page view (w hich is a bit l ike the Library module’s G rid view ).To get a closer look at each spread,click the Spread view icon (or press C md/Ct rl+R ). You can then tap the arrow keys to fli p through each spread to get a clearer preview of the book’s content.C md/Ct rl+ T w ill give you a closer look in S ingle Page view.P ress C md/Ct rl+E to go back to the M ulti -Page view once you’ve checked your book’s pages.

7

Modify a page

Sw ap photos around by dragging one photo onto another. T he p hotos are zoomed to fi ll a p age by def ault .C li ck a p hoto to select it.U se the Z oom slider to reveal the photo’s ori ginal composition.T o modify the layout of a page,click t o highlight it.C lick the litt le triangle icon at the bottom-right and choose a headin g such as � Photos.Select a layout from the icons b elow . D rag a photo into a field to add it to the page.

6

Rearrange the layout

8

Edit the text

T he B ook mod ule lays out the phot os automat ical ly and adds caption s.It leaves one p age blank by default.G o to the A uto Layout panel and change the Preset drop-dow n menu to O ne Photo Per Page.Cli ck the C lear Layout button.You can n ow drag photos from the Filmstr ip ont o each page manually.To w ork more quickly,click the A uto Layout button.You now have a book w ith few er pages,so it w ill be cheaper to pri nt.

C lick the text field of a photo,and in t he T ype panel,choose a new font.Set Size to 77 points.Click C haracter and choose a neutral w hite.D rag the O ffset slider in the Text panel to 67� p oints to place the text at the top.C lick a text fi eld’s pop-up icon to create captions,or replace the text w ith metadata.W hen you’re fini shed,click Send Book to B lurb,or click C reate Saved Book to add it to the C ollections panel. 155

h

Lightr oom

y o


http://bit. ly/tylr2016

B E F O R E

Cr eate a sl ide show U se the S lideshow module to present a series of your stills ocation

O

e’re kely to sho w the h gh gh ts of ou r shoo

to frien s or cl en s as t hi e p ocessing

bn ai s on the cam era’s display.

ages in Lightroom s Library

e can ap

the F key to clear the screen of allo he r pane s,an d then

ap

the arrow keys to d splay ou r ph otos on e by o e w th a ful -screen splay.Y ou can also se ect a particu arly satisfying p oto an d ch oo se Fi e>Em ailPh oto,so that specif c fr en s or col eagu es can qu ckl en oy the frui s of yo r abo Lightroo

s Sl desho w

s.

od ule provides ano her w ay to share

you r pho os d gi aly – as a sequ ence o orm at on o

e sl de sho

as display the cam era setti gs used caption each

g op tion

ages.Yo u can add ext

,such as caption s an d ti es,as w el o capture each ph oto.T his i

orks autom at caly becau se Ligh troo m can gather

age’s m etadata for i s speci c sh oo ti g sett gs.B ei g ab e to

share m etadata as a capt on s useful slde sho w

hen produ cing an edu cat on al

at s d esign ed o help others capture m ore ef ect ve im ages

n sh oo ti g scenarios. As w ellas adding caption s to each p hoto w e’lshow you how and ailyo ur sl de sh ow ,so yo u can add that

ant contact nfor

o top at on

lh elp p otentialcl en s to get in ou ch. ou can also au gm en

you r slde show you ho w

h m usic t acks s ored on you r PC.W e’lalso show

o expo rt you r slde show as a video clp,so hat tho se no

si g Ligh 156

po

oo m can see it.


157


1

Create a Collection

Start by going to the Library module’s C ollections panel and clickin g the + icon.C reate a C ollection called M onochrome M agic.T ick the Set as Target Collection box and click O K .C lick some of the edited black-and-w hite conversions w e’ve supplied in the G rid view and press B to add each one to the M onochrome M agic C ollection.O r if you already have your ow n C ollection,use those instead.C lick C ollection to see its thumbnails.

3

Customise the layout

Each image appears w ithin w hite guides on its ow n page. If you click Z oom to Fill Frame in the option s bar,then each photo w ill be enlarged to fill the guides.H ow ever,that w ill spoil your carefully composed images,so leave this opti on unt icked.G o to the Layout panel.M ake sure that Show G uides is ticked.You can drag a w hite margin to enlarge or shrin k the enclosed photo.T his margin change w ill be appli ed to the other photos.

158

2

Reorder the photos

C lick the Slideshow label in the M odule picker.The current C ollection’s thumbnails w ill be taken into the Slideshow module.O pen the Filmst rip at the bottom to see the Collection’s contents.Set the U se drop-dow n menu to A ll Filmstrip Photos. You can use the arrow keys to scroll t hrough the photos and see them in the slide show view er.D rag the thumbnails in the Filmstr ip to reorder their appearance in the slide show .

4

Add a border

T o com pl emen t your im ages w it h a clas si c p ri nt look, you can add a w hite border to them.G o to the options panel and make sure that the Stroke Border b ox is ticked.Increase the W idth slider to �� pixels.You could click the adjacent w hite sw atch and choose a diff erent border colour,but w hite w ill look best in this inst ance.For a less distractin g shadow ,drag the O pacity slider to ��% .You can also adjust other shadow attributes,such as A ngle.


5

Give it a title

G o to the O verlays panel and cli ck the Identity Plate preview ’s tri angle icon.T he Identity P late editor w ill appear.T ype some descriptive text or a title into the text field and choose a clean, non-distracting sans-serif font such as M yriad Pro.A lternatively, you could import a Photoshop-created image w ith a l ogo against a transp arent background and use that as a graphical Identity Plate. C lick O K .Drag Scale to ��% .

7

Display the metadata

If you click the A BC icon you can type custom text,or click the drop-dow n menu to choose Exposure.T his adds a caption that add s the camera’s shut ter sp eed and apert ure setti ngs to each photo.You can anchor the caption to a particular corner,and it w ill appear in the same relative position in each photo.U se the Intro and Ending Screen panels to add additional information such as your w eb portfolio or contact details.

6

Add a watermark

8

Play it back

In our w atermarkin g w alkthrough in chapter nin e w e created a copyright preset.To access and apply your copyright preset to each image in the slide show ,tick the W atermarkin g box. C hoose a preset from the pop-up option (or click Edit W atermarks to create one).Your sli de show may be w atched on a small device, so go into the W atermark Editor and increase the Size (or choose Fit).C lick S ave.Label the edited preset and click C reate.

U se the Playback panel to change the duration of each photo and the length of the fade from one image into another. For a series of cuts,drop Fade to �.H it Preview to get a sense of timing.C lick C reate saved S lideshow to store it in the Library module’s C ollections p anel.You can edit or add to i t later.You can also export the slid e show as a PD F or self-contained vid eo clip using the buttons on the bottom left. 159

Teach your sel fLightroom PU BLISH YOU R IM AG ES GET THE FILES HERE:


BEFORE

Make a triptych U se the P rint module to place three images on a single page e w a y to p e s e n t s i a r y - t h e m e d p h o o s is t e rg e t h e m n t o a s in g le t r p t y ch d o c u m e n t . O u r s q u a r e i Po n e s n a p s a r e c a p t u e d o m d i f e r e n t o c a t io n s , b u t t e y a ll e a t u r e t h e s u n n t h e c e t r o f t h e f ra m e . y p a c i g t h r e e s i a r p h o t o s i n t o a s i g l t r p t y c h w e c a n c r e a te a u s e fu l n e w a s s e t t h a t c a n b e u s e d t o e n a n c e a ra n g e o f L g h t ro o m o je c t s . s w e ll a s p r i t i t h e t r p t y c h a s a h a r d c o p y o a m e , y o u c o u d s e it a s a b a n e r in a w e b g a l e r y , o r a s p a r t o f a B o o k m o d u l e ’s la y o u n t h e p e v io u s c h a p e r o n p r i t i g f o m L g h t ro o , d e m o n s t a te d h o w o c u s to m s e th e s iz e a n d p o s i o n o f th e P t m e ’ s c e s t o c r e a t e a Pc t u r e Pc k a g e t h a t f e a t u r e d a l a r g e v e r s io n o f t h e p h o t o p u s s o e p a s s p o r t - s i z e d i a g e s . n s w a lk t h r o u g h e ’ l u s e t h e s a m e c e ll P t m o d u l t o o ls t o c r e a te a t r i y c h a y o t a n d t h e n a d d t h r e e s u i ta b l t o s t o t h e c e l s fr o m t h e F s t r p . s t e a d o f r i t i t h e t r i t y c h e ’ l e m s t r a te h o w t o e r t i t a s a JPEG a n d t h e n r t a n d c r o p t h e JPEG n t h e D e v e p o d o c r e a e a b a n e r y o u c a n u s e t o e n h a n c e o t h e r p r o je c t s .

O

Create square cells n h e Pn t Pg e S t u p Pc k a g e . n t h e s e E t . o c k A d d . c k 160

m o d u le o p t io n . e l s p a n c r e a t e a th e n e w

c h o o s e n t h e L e l , c l c k s q u a r e � x � b u

a la a y o u a b c e l l, o n

n d s c t Sy t t t y p e o a

Populate the cells ap e p a g le p a n e s t r ia n � . �� x d d o

e f o m h e l t ic k u s t o m g u a r ic o � � � c h e s . m o r e c e l s .

I n t h e Gr i . t h e m d d e o a g e i t o e o r k s p a c e .

R Dr a f th a c h d d

e r s , Gr g t h e c e e p a g e . c e l . u a b la c k

id & G e s s i n t o e q a Fo m t h e F r n o f f S o w b a c k g r o u n d

p a n e l , l y s p a s t r ip Gu i d e f ro m

s e t Gr c e d v ie w , s f o r a h e Pg

id S a p t o s it i s i n d r a g a s q u a r c le a n e e p a n e l

T

h yo

L PUBLISH YOUR IMAGES

AFTER

3

Add a border

G o to t he Imag Image e Setti ngs panel panel.C lick t he Inner Inner St roke box.C lick i ts colour sw atch and and choose w hit e.Set the stroke’s W id th slider to �.� �.� to separate separate the t hree photos from from the blac black k backgroun backgroun d.In d.In t he Pr in t Job Job panel,set ,set t he Pr in t t o drop-dow drop-dow n menu to JPEG JPEG .

4

Turn it into a banner

C lick Pr in t to File File to sav save e the tri ptych.In the Li brary mod ule,cl ule,click Imp Imp or t and b row se to T r ip tych.jpg.C lick Impor t.T ake the photo i nto t he D evel evelop modu le.G rab the C rop Fr ame tool.C lick the padlock padlock icon.C rop t he photo to rem ove th e large canvas and cr eate a bann er -shaped file. file. 161

Teach your ur sel fLightroom PU BLISH YOU R IM AG ES GET THE FILES HERE:

http://bit http://bit .ly/tylr2016 .ly/tylr2016

Publish Publish your photos online E xport your your p roces rocesss ed pictur pictures es to soci s ocial al netw orki orking sites sites such as Facebook,an Facebook,and d di d is play phot photos onli online w ith Light Lightroo room m W eb n e o f h e m o s t c o m o n a y s to s h a re p ic tu r e s i a s o c ia l e d a s it e s s u c h a s F c e b k a n d F c k e s e e l e c t r o n c o u t le t s e n a b e u s t o e o y s ta n e e d b a c k o n o u r w o r k f o m r ie n d s , c o l e a g u e s o r h e r p e o p e w h o a re in t e re s te d n p h o t o g ra p h y a n d a g e i n g . L g h t ro o m a c k n o e d g e s t h e n e e d o s h o w c a se y o u r a g e s b y in c lu d n g u p o a d n k s to s o m e o f th e m o s t p o p u a r a r i g s i te s i n i ts P s h S r v ic e s p a n e l. s p a n e l a ls o k s t o B e h a n c e , a s e r v i c e f o r c r e a t iv e o f e s s io n a ls w e d t o s h a r e th e r a g e s a n d e x c h a n g e f e e d b a c k h t h e i e r s . e Pb l s h S r v ic e s p a n e l a ls o e a b l e s y o u o s a v r t e d a g e s n a a r t i c u a r f o r m a t ( c h a s JPEG

O o t e d s h e e e x

Log in to Lightroom Mobile Yo c l L g h t ro o u s e rn a m L g h t ro o 162

u a y b c k o n t h m n d e a n d p m o b

e lo g g e d e i d e n t i o w . Yo u a s s o rd , e s h a r i

n a y p l l b e a n d g f e

l e a d y , b u a te in t h e p o m p t e o n c e y o u a t e s w

t if t o p d to ’v e l b e

o t - le f e n d o n c o

y o u e e d t c o r n e r o f t h e e r y o u r A d o b e e t h a t h e e a v a i a b le .

DNG . S y c l c k n S t U p a n d o g t o a s e r v i c e s u c h a s F c eb o o k s i g y o r p a s s o r d a n d lo g i n d e t a i s . L g h o o m C o f fe rs a n o h e r v e ry u s e fu l e a tu r e – a m e ly , L g h t ro o m W e b . s is s e p a r a t e t o i s W e b p b l is h o d u l e , h i c h c r e a t e s w e b g a l e r ie s f o r u p l o a d g t o y o u r o w n e b s i e h o s t a n d e q u e s a l e m o r e w o r k . L g h t ro o W e b d o e s n t re q e a n y i n t e r v e n t io n a t a l , b e c a u s e a n o l e c t io n a t y o u s y n c h r o n s e w h L g h t ro o m M o b e i a ls o u p o a d e d o y o u r o w n o n l n e s p a c e w h e r e y o u c a n v i e w y o r c o l e c t io n s , s h a r e l k s w t h o t h e r s a n d e v e n e d t y o a g e s a f te r t h e y e o e . o s e e t h i s in a c t io n , s i o l o w o u r w a lk t h r o u g h b e lo w

Sync collections o s h a c o e c t t o t h e le f t o f t s y m b o , o r u s e s a m e m e n u o

r e a c o l le c t io n (o u io n s y e t ), y o u c a n e h e c o e c t io n a m e t h e r ig h t - c l c k c o v e w s h a re d c o l e c

c a n t s h a r it h e r c l c k , c h e x t m e n t o n s o n n

e fo l d e r s o t h e S a r e l d i s p la y a . Yo u c a n e .

r s m a r t b o s y n u s e t h e

Teach yours you rse elf PUBLISH YOUR IMAGES

3

View your collections

T he V iew on W eb men u op ti on in the p reviou s step image image w ill launch a brow brow ser w indow show show ing the the contents of your shared shared collection – and all of your other other shared shared collections,displayed as a vertical vertical column dow n the left si de of the screen.N screen.N ote the Share button at the top.

4

Edit your photos

You can can edit edit your photos photos w ithin your w eb brow ser, using a simplified set of tools in t hree tabs:C rop, Presets,A djust.T he image image w e have have open open here show s the adjustmen ts already applied in Lightroom on our desktop. A ny changes changes w e make make here w ill be synchronised w ith that. 163

h

Lightr oom

y o


Cr eate an onl ine pho hoto to por tf ol io S how how cas e your your pi p ictures in an interactiv nteractive gall gallery using the tool toolss and an d templ temp lates in Li L ightro ghtroom’ om’s W eb modul mod ule e ny ph otograph otograph ers ers presen presen t

M

n an on

eir

ages

e gal ery to prom ote thei

shoo sh oo ti g and an d i age-e

ti g ski s,

hat a ho ugh you have a w ebsi ng

o w ork o n a w ebsi e’s con en t w hile tryi g to as er

eb design p ackages ackages.You .You

ay also have

been dis acted acted by easier w ays to sh are are an d yo ur

use the the W eb m odu e to to add ext and em aill nks, so v ew ers ers of yo ur si e w

Yo u can also use the w ater

even i

Lightroom s W eb m odu e enables you to ages and urn hem

nto

eract ve w eb gal g aleri eries w tho t any cod

ages w

ebsi e an d creat create alli s w eb-ready eb-ready co es,you es,y ou

po nen

st ln eed the services services of a w eb h osti

provider such as w up oad yo ur L gh

BEFORE

suse,

om you r si e.W hi

Lightroom s W eb m odu e can can help you design you

ho w

eb gal ery ery tem plat plates

lb e protect protected from

hey are are dow nloaded nloaded

kn ow edge.In his his w alkthrough kthrough w e’lshow e’ lshow you o explore explore a range o

h yo u.

arki arking ng techniqu techniqu es

eatured eatured in the p eviou eviou s chap er to m ake su e that

no HT

ed.

lb e able able to to learn learn m ore

about your w ork and get in ouch

you r onl ne i

L or F ash kn ow edge is requ

o b e up oaded an

e,as e,a s w el as creates al the fies fi es

ph otos,such otos,such as by u sing a Facebook Facebook page,w here

ake a Col ect on of

164

sp ayed aye d o

necessary to m ake yo ur si e fun fun ct on .Yo u can

show cas ng you r w ork,i s ou t of date.Th date.Th s cou be d ue o he act hat it can can be ti e-consu

llook n

eb brow ser.Lightroo m autom at caly caly res zes your ph otos otos to to en able them them

enjoy feedback,and feedback,and drum up business.

Yo u m ay f nd

and previ preview how your i ages ages w

1and 1and 1.co.uk so that you can oo m gal ery ery o t.



165


1

Create a Collection

A s w ith creating photo books or slid e show s,it makes sense to gather the contents of your w eb gallery to a Coll ection before moving them to the W eb module.T his time w e’ll use the Painter tool to collect our portrait-themed images together.In the Library module,go to the C ollections panel and click t he + icon.C hoose C reate Collection.Label it Portraits C ollection.Ti ck the Set as T arget C ollection box.Cli ck Create.

3

Modify the appearance

C lick the Portraits Collection label to see your photos.C lick W eb in the M odule picker.G o to the Layout Style panel and choose A irtight Postcard View er.The gallery preview w indow w ill display your collection as thumbnails.Cl ick a thumbnail and it w ill zoom in to fill the screen.U se the A ppearance panel to choose the number of columns that suit your C ollection.Increase the D istant Z oom factor to enlarge the thumbnail size.

166

2

Add to the Collection

C lick the Painter tool icon.Set its drop-dow n menu to Target C ollection.C lick any portrait photos in the G rid view .Clicking on a photo w ill add it to the Target C ollection (w hich in this case is the Portrait s C ollection ).You’ll see the number value by the Port rait C ollection’s label increase as you click new portrait thumbnails to add to it.T he Pain ter can be set to adjust a variety of attri butes,such as adding a specific star rating,for example.

4

Add watermarks and captions

A s w ith the Book module,you can add w atermarks and captions to your photos.In the Image Info p anel tick C aption and choose Expos ure to add the camera settin gs metadata to each photo.In O utput Settings tick W atermarking and apply a w atermark preset (such as the one w e created in the previous chapter).T o stop the w atermark overlappi ng the photo’s metadata caption at the bottom-left,cli ck Edi t W atermarks and change the anchor point to the top-right.


5

Save the gallery

W hen you click a thumbnail it w ill fill the screen and display the camera settings as a caption on the bottom-left.Your copyright w atermark w ill appear at the top-right.If you’re happy w ith your gallery’s layout and captions,click the C reate Saved W eb G allery button at the top of the w orkspace.Label your gallery.C lick C reate.You’ll now be able to see and access your saved w eb gallery in the C ollection s panel,so you can access and modify any of i ts attributes.

7

Experiment with layouts

O nce you’ve saved a version of your gallery i n the C ollection s panel,experiment w ith other template layouts.You can access your original gallery at any time.G o to W eb>Create N ew W eb Gallery. Label it.Toggle open the Template brow ser at the left of the W eb module.A s you move the cursor over the templates you’ll see a preview of the layouts in the Preview w indow .C lick to select a layout (such as C lean)to see how your photos look in that template.

6

Upload the gallery

8

Add your email information

T o up load the com pon ents of y our gall ery to a host in g si te’s FT P server,go to the U pload Settings panel and set the FT P S erver drop-dow n menu to Edit.T ype in your hosting site’s FT P details and enter your user name and passw ord.Cl ick O K .You can then use the W eb module’s U pload button to get your gallery onli ne.A lternatively, you can click Export to create all the assets needed to present your site and upload them using a third-party FT P application such as T ransmit.

T yp e in to t he n ew gall ery’s t ext fi elds to ad d i nf orm ation .In the Site Info box type your email address into the W eb or M ail Link fi eld.W hen people click your name in the gallery this w ill launch their mail application and automatically fill in your email address.To test how your gallery looks and behaves,click the Preview in B row ser button.Lightroom exports the assets and p resents them in your brow ser.You can then check the mail li nk. 167

Teach yourself Lightroom ADVANCED SKILLS

168

T

h yo

L ADVANCED SK ILLS

A d v a n c e d You’ve learnt the basics, now flex your creative muscles with our extended Lightroom projects for advanced users

170

Get creative with Lightroom

178

Retouch your images like a pro

M aster t he D evelop module and apply a lim i tless arr ay of creati ve effects to your ow n photos

Polish your port raits using Li ghtroom ’s raw -edit in g tools to app ly p rofessional retouching techniques

186

Apply a vintage postcard look

194

Turn day into night in Lightroom

D iscover how to use Li ghtroom’s D evelop m odu le to add creat ive vi nt age effects to your raw files

Learn how to use the selective adjustmen t tools in L ight room to t ransfor m a dayti me photo into a noctur nalphoto

169

h

Lightr oom

y o

AD VAN C ED S KILLS GET THE FILES HERE:

Get cr eative with Lightr oom M aster the D evelop module for a limitless array of creative effects er the n ext ew pages w e’lshow you a side o Lightroom you

O

ay n ot have seen before.W e’ ltake it for a creat ve sp n and nco ver how

ages in a ra ge of Com pared w any

o u se the D evelop

od

e (or al ernatively,t

ear-iden ticalcon trols in Cam era Ra )to t ansform yo on derful y crea ve w ays.

h Pho osho p Elem ents or CC,Lightroo m do esn’t offer

ere near the d epth o

oo s for i age edi

g.B t t do es give yo

he kind of oo s you n eed to m ake a huge range of on alef ects.W hat’ ore,because Lightroom em ploys param et c edi ng are saved n a ‘side car’f e),everythi g s co

etely

here allch anges on -d estr ctive.

Of cou se,w e can use separa e layers for no n- de structive editi n Pho osho p,b ut the top-d ow n w ay that layers w ork m eans you st ave to app oach asks in a certain egi en ed ashion .B y co Lightroo you

s approach m eans you

ke.W hich in m any w ays

ef ects by –

ast

e f ee to ch ange any hing ,w hen ever

akes it easier o exp er

ent w

or exam ple – convert ng to m on ochrom e or shi

h tonal ng

colou s.S o for certain tasks,Lightroo m offers even greater creative eedom

han Photoshop.

Of course,Lightroo m

or Cam era Ra )isn’t a Photoshop eplacem ent.

In stead,it sho uld orm on e part of a ph otograph er s w orkf ow .For m ost the b est ap

oach s to get as far as ossible w th the too s in Lightroo

or Cam era Raw ,then op en he

age into Pho osho p or further

chan ges.B ut this do esn’t m ean Ligh troo m Th e tools and slders w allk

ds o

hin

s Develop

s just for the b asic stuff od ule en able yo u o

ake

ansform at ve ef ects,f om dream y co ou r w ashes to retr

ef ects,m on o presets and crazy m ake-up. Tu n he page to discover how 170



171

Teach yourself ADVANCED SK ILLS

C

e sh

Use Lightroom’s powerful selective tools to recreate these creative colour effects in your own photographs ou might think that Lightroom is only designed for making basic tonal tw eaks,black-and-w hite conversions ,sharpenin g,and so on.In other w ords,for all of the fund amental thin gs that photographers need.Lightroom does all of these things really w ell,but it also gives you the opportunity to trans form your images in sur pri sin gly creative w ays,such as this colourful portrait effect opposite. T w o p ow erf ul Li ghtroom tools cent ral to thi s techn iq ue are the G raduated Filter and A djustment br ush tools.Both of these tools enable you to define an area for adjustin g – either by painti ng,or by plotting tw o points for a gradual blend. You can then use the sliders at the top-right of the interface to change the exposure,colour or detail as you see fit.T he most obvious use for this is for selective lightening and darkening,but i t’s also possibl e to create interesting effects by toying w ith colour,saturation and clarity settin gs. T he w alkt hrough on the nex t sp read takes you thr ough t he steps required to recreate the image on the right,but the pri ncip les remain the same for w hatever image you use,so feel free to experiment w ith your ow n images.W e also reveal four further Lightroom treatments you can try for yourself…

Y

172

BEFORE


AFTER

173

Teach yourself ADVANCED SKILLS

1

Lighten the background

Impor t ‘cover_bef ore.dn g’in to Li ghtroom,t hen go the D evelop module.Set Temperature to �� ,T int to �,Exposure to +� .�6,H ighlights to -��,B lacks to -��,and V ibrance to +�6. N ext,go to the H SL Panel and click Lumin ance.G rab the T arget tool from the top left of the panel,then click and drag upw ards on the background to in crease the Blue and A qua sliders.G rab the A djustment br ush from the toolbar.

3

Add more colours

C lick N ew at the top,then go to the Color box and choose a dif ferent colour,keepin g to subtle pastel tones.C lick around the image a few more times to add dif ferent colour s pots,building up the effect gradually.Cli ck N ew again to set more Edit pins for other colours. You might w ant to try st icking to pastels of one or tw o colours,such as red and purple or blue and green,rather than going for the pastel neon look w e’ve gone for .

174

2

Paint the coloured spots

4

Apply coloured gradients

Scroll up to the A djustment brush s liders at the top of the right-hand side panels.Cl ick the C olor box and choose a pastel pink colour,then increase Exposure slightly to about �.6�.G o to the Br ush setti ngs and set Si ze �7,Feather �� . C lick in the image to set an Edit pin,then click around to add spots of subtle colour,using the square bracket keys to resize your brush tip as you go.

G rab the G raduated Filter from the toolbar.Set si milar colour and exposure settings as before,then drag in from the topleft corner to add a gradated blend that starts off in the corner and gradually fall s off.C lick in other areas to add more coloured gradient effect s,adjust in g the colour s as you go.It’s best t o buil d up t he layers of effects subt ly.Take Snaps hots as you go,so you can easily compare dif ferent versions.

Teach yourself Lightroom BEF ORE

ADVANCED SKILLS

Four Lightroom treatments Work fast with a tool that combines selection features with useful preset image adjustments

STANDARD RETOUCH Use the Basic Panel sliders to increase colour and reveal detail, then plot an S- shaped curve on the Tone Curv e li ne to add extra punch and saturation. Next, grab the Adjustment brush, paint a mask over the eyes and use the sliders at the top- right to li ghten and boost the area. Click New and paint another mask over the skin, then set Clarity to - 7� to soften the area.

RETRO FILM EFFECTS Crop the image to square then grab the Graduated Filter tool. Set Exposure -� .� � and draw four thi n gradients around each edge. Drag another gradient in from one corner, then click the Color box and choose a bright orange, with Temp 7�, Exposure �.�� for a light leak effect. Go to the Tone Curve, click Channel and select Blue. Drag up on the bottom- left corner and down on the top-r ight.

POP COLOUR Go to the HSL panel and choose Saturation, then simply grab the Target tool from the top-left of the panel and drag down over the colours you want to remove, or use the sliders in the panel. Next, grab the Adjustment brush and set Saturation to , then paint w ith the brush to completely remove any remaining unwanted colour.

CLOWN FACE Go to the H SL panel and click H ue, then drag Blue to +��. Grab the Adjustment brush and paint a series of masks while using the tonal sliders and Color box to alter different parts of the face. For example, to add the mouth, we’ve painted a mask over the area, then set Temperature -� , Exposure - .8�, Clarity , Saturation � , Color Red. 175

Teach yourself ADVANCED SK ILLS

1 E N O T T I L P S

Instant gic

on

Apply quick, easy monochrome effects with Lightroom presets ightroom is a preset lovers’paradise.Presets are so easy to set up,organise and apply that you could conceivably n ever have to perform the same task more than once – just set the task up as a preset and apply forever after w ith a sin gle click. W e’ve used a few of the existing Black and W hite and toning presets here to give you an idea of the effects that can be quickly applied.To try them out for yourself on your ow n i mages,simply cli ck through them in the Presets panel to the left of the interface.Even i f the P resets don’t have the exact d esired effect that you w ere looking for,they can be a useful startin g point f or further tw eaks using the right-hand side panels.A nd if you do decide to make a few changes,w hy not set up an alternative preset of your ow n? Just click t he plus icon in the Presets panel w hen you’re done,to save it for f uture reuse.

L

BEFORE

176

R E T L I F N E E R G


4 E N O T T I L P S

R E T L I F D E R

E P Y T O N A Y C

177

h

Lightr oom

y o



Retouch your images l ike apr o Polish your portraits using Lightroom’s raw -editing tools to apply professional retouching techniques any of us consider Adob e Pho oshop o com e i

M

o v ersion s – Elem ents and

he bu dget-f end y Ph otoshop ore sop hist cated Pho osho p CC.

e tend o over ook Photoshop Lightroom as

som et

g that fals betw een these t o stals.Ligh troo m CC

s now sold in a p ackage w th Pho osh op CC,eq at g it som e peop e’s m nd s w

h the cheaper Elem ents,or even

th a freeb e.B t it’s act aly j st as pow erf las t e m ore expen sive incarnat on of Photoshop processing aw

hen t com es t

es.B y sh oo ti g in aw yo u get access t

ore of a ph otograph s colou r an d tonal

orm at on ,so i

uch easier to etou ch a shot w hi e keep ng blocky PEG com

ession artefacts at bay.

Ligh

oo m do esn’t give yo u access o layers,of cou se,

so its of

e u se i yo u

age.H ow ever,i yo

an t to

ake a creat ve co

re pri ariy i

colou r or ton alp ob em s in you r raw provides you

po si

erested in fi es,then Lightroo

h a p ow er ul digi ald arkroom

han ks t

on -d estr ctive an d se ective ed ti g tools such as the Ad ustm ent brush an d the G adient too g o n ou r po rtait editi g p ece in chapeter eigh t, n this tutorial yo

earn

ow to f atter t e su

ects of

you r po rt ai s by rem oving spo s and blem shes,and h ow o select vely sof en skin usi g A sho w yo u

ow

using he select ve A djust backdrops,w hich w

lh elp o draw

lalso discover that Ligh

th a few cl cks.H ere’s how

o u se the

st the l gh ti g o yo r stud he eye to y ou r sub ect

oo m

prese s that enable you o p er orm com

178

aski g tools.W e’

ent brush,an d how

ad ated Fi er too lto ad Yo

o

o tease ou t del cate iris colou r and extur

s p acked ullo on ph oto retouch es

BEFORE


AFTER

179


1

Import the starting image

Before fir in g up Lightroom,dow nload lr_retouch.dng onto your computer’s hard drive.W hen you make edits to this digital n egative file you need to be able to save any changes w ith the file,so it has to be stored on a hard drive (and not a C D )for this to happen.Launch Lightroom.In the Library module,click Import an d brow se to lr_retouch.dng.C lick A dd at the top of the w indow ,then click Import.

3

Tackle the colour problems

H it t he space bar to see the shot as a w hole.Toggle open the Basic panel on the right.In the W B (W hite Balance)section, drag the Temperature slider left to �� to cool things dow n a littl e. If you can’t get the precis e value using the sl ider alone,you can type it i nto the fi eld on the ri ght,although it’s usually better to use the sli der s o you can gauge it just right.T o counteract the magenta hue, drag the T int slider left to -�.

180

2

Take a closer look

4

Tweak the tones

T he un proces sed star ti ng i mage is a li ttl e too w arm and has a magenta colour cast.If y ou tap the space bar to zoom in you’ll see a few spots on t he subject’s f ace that her make-up has failed to conceal.T he focus on her eyes is a litt le soft too.To retouch the colour,sharpen the eyes and tw eak the tones you’ll need to enter Lightroom’s digital darkr oom.To do thi s,click t he D evelop module link at the top of the w orkspace.

In the histogram w ind ow the graph peters out before it reaches the far right.T his in dicates that the shot lacks stron g highlight information.T he shadow s on the far left are fairly w eak too.For stron ger shadow s and bri ghter highlights,go to the T one section of the Basic panel and d rag C ontrast to ��.T he histogram graph spreads a little w ider to indi cate that more shadow and highlight information is present in the image.


5

Boost the midtone contrast

From the his togram you can see that there’s lots of mi dtone information peaking in the middle of the graph.If you drag the C larity sli der ri ght to a value of +�� you can in crease the contrast of these midtones w ithout altering the brightest highlights or the darkest shadow s.T his darkens the midtone grey studi o backdrop a little,making the lighter-toned model stand out more effectively w ithin the frame.

7

Zoom in

O nce you’ve adjusted your port rait’s colours and ton es usi ng the B asic p anel,it’s t ime to focus on enhanci ng the sub ject’s ski n.C lick t he Spot R emoval tool’s icon i n the min i toolbar (just below the histogram).You can also summon this tool by pressing Q . A new panel w ill drop dow n.C lick the H eal button,leave O pacity at �� ,then press C md/C trl and the + key to zoom in for a closer look at the tiny details on the face.

6

Adjust the colours

8

Remove the spots

In the Presence section of t he Basic panel,drag V ibrance up to +��.T his boosts the strength of w eaker colours such as the skin tones,w ithout over-saturating the stronger colours i n the subject’s li ps.T o fin e-tune the overall colour strength,drop Saturation d ow n to -7.T hese basic tw eaks produce more natural and healthy-looking colours and tones i n t his i mage.You’ll n eed to experiment w ith your ow n pictures.

R educe the Spot R emoval tool’s Si ze to around �� by dragging the Size slider left,or by tapping the left square bracket key a few tim es.If your mouse has a scroll w heel you can use that to resize brush-based tools like this as w ell.Cli ck a spot or any other blemish on the skin.T he tool w ill automatically sample a clean patch of adjacent ski n and place it over the unw anted spot. 181


9

Fine-tune your edits

O n the w hole,the Spot Removal tool w ill do a good job of automatically sampling a clean area to place over an unw anted spot.H ow ever,if the spot i s near a detailed feature such as the edge of the face,you run the risk of sampling this area and placing it over the spot.If this happens,you can click the sampled circle and drag it into a more appropriate area to fine-tune the results.

11

Make selective adjustments

Z oom in f or a closer look at the subject’s ir ises.T hey are slightly soft.To sharpen them up w ithout altering the correctly f ocused areas in the rest of the shot,grab the A djustment brush from the mini toolbar (or summon it by pressing K ).A new panel of editable options w ill appear.A t the top of the panel of sliders is an Effect drop-dow n menu.O pen the menu by clicking C ustom,then choose Iri s Enhance.

182

10

Try Tool Overlay

12

Enhance the irises

It can b e a challenge to see how the spot-removal process is shapin g up because of the tool’s di stracti ng circular overlays.N avigate to the Tool O verlay option at the bottom-left of the image and set it to A uto.T he circular overlays w ill vani sh,enablin g you to see the healed areas more effectively. W hen you move the Spot R emoval tool back onto the face,the overlays w ill reappear,so you can contin ue to fin e-tune them.

T he Iri s E nhan ce pr eset boost s the E xpos ure s li der to �.�� to br ighten the eyes.It also i ncreases C lari ty to �� to increase the midtone contrast and reveal delicate iris textures and details.The Saturation slider is increased to �� to boost the iris colour. Reduce the brush tip Si ze to �.�.C lick to place an Edi t pin on the iris . N ow paint to tease out the delicate iris textures and colours.Paint over the other iris too.


13

Use masks

15

Sharpen the eyelashes

If you tick the Show Selected M ask O verlay box at the bottom of the w indow ,the areas altered by the A djustment br ush w ill appear as red patches.If t he brush strokes have strayed over t he w hites of the eyes,hold dow n the A lt key and a minus icon w ill appear in t he brush tip.You can now paint to remove certain features from the adjusted areas.U nti ck the M ask O verlay box w hen you’ve finished ti dying up the masks.

C lick N ew to retouch the under-eye areas ind ependently of the eyes themselves.Push the Shadow s sli der up to �� so that the brush can selectively lighten t he shadow s and midtones.C lick to place an E dit pin under an eye and then paint to lighten t he darker areas and make them less prominent.C lick N ew and set the Effect drop-dow n menu to Sharpness.Paint carefully over the eyelashes to give them a little more definition.

14

Enhance the whites

16

Enhance the lips

In the A djustment br ush’s p roperties panel,click N ew to create a new Edit pi n.N ow click the Effect dropdow n menu and choose D odge (Lighten).T his sets Ex posure to �.��.Cli ck to place an Edit pin on the w hite of the right eye,then paint over the w hites of both eyes to gently brighten t hem.T o make the veins in the eyes look less red,drop Saturation to -�� and paint over these too.

C lick N ew once again and choose Saturation from the Effect drop-dow n menu.By default this pushes the Saturation sl ider up to �� so you can boost the colour of specific areas.Cli ck to place an Ed it pi n on t he lips and then paint over them. For a change of lips tick colour,click the C olor icon.C hoose a colour from the tab or type in a H ue (H )of �� and set S aturation (S) to a subtle �8% . 183

T

L

h yo

ADVANCED SK ILLS

17

Soften the skin

C lick N ew,t hen choose the Soften Ski n pr eset from t he Effect menu .In the Br ush tab,ti ck A uto M ask and set Flow to �� .C lick t he mod el’s cheek to samp le thi s ski n t one and then paint over her face.Simi lar toned pixels w illbecome softer w hile other areas w illbe left un touched thanks to A uto M ask.C lick the pi n and drag left t o redu ce the strength of the C larit y and S harp ness slid ers for a mor e subtle skin soften in g.

L g h

m

18

Apply the finishing touches

G o to the H SL t ab and click Lumi nance.Set Red and O range to +�� and Yellow to + ��.T o create a cooler background,go to the Basic tab and reduce Temperature to ��. Set V ibrance to +�� and Saturation to -��.For m ore contrast,go to Tone C urve and set the Point C urve to M edium Contr ast.G rab the G raduated Filter and set Effect t o B ur n (D arken).Set Ex posure to -�.�� .Fin ally,drag to d arken the t op-left cor ner of th e im age.

Ps a

d

s k

The easy way to make selective adjustments to your photos 1 EFFECT

1 2

2 EDIT PINS

4 3

Click this drop-down menu to access a host of useful retouching presets, such as Soften Skin or Teeth W hitening.

Click to place an Edit pin in an area. Here, the Edit pin is responsible for adjustments to the subject’s irises.

3 FINE-TUNE hen you click a pin, an adjustment arrow will appear. Drag left to reduce the strength of the associated adjustments, or right to increase them.

4 MASKS To see which areas a particular pin is altering, click the Show Selected Mask Overlay button at the bottom-left. The edited areas will appear in red. 184

ON SALE NOW

162 PAGE GUIDE

Essential seasonal advice on shooting landscapes and wildlife from the experts at Digital Camera magazine. www.myfavouritemagazines.co.uk/photography/outdoor-photo

h

Lightr oom

y o



Appl yavintage postcar dl ook D iscover how to use Lightroom’s D evelop module to add creative vintage effects to your raw files ghtroom

L

ay now com e packaged w

h the fullversion

of Photoshop CC,su ggest ng that Ad ob e w ant us to u se both tools,but i s pow er ul Develop sop

CC.I nd eed ,Ligh

st cated im age-e oo

od ule boasts som

ti g too s to rival

lPh otosh op

s raw edit g too s are high y ef ect ve,w

akes it an at act ve u pg ade p ackage i yo u’ e a Pho osh op Elem ents user

ho

ants m ore raw processing controlw

hou

blow ng you r bud get.Yo u can d ow nload a f ee t alversion of Lightroo m an d get to g ri s w th it by fol ow 186

g this t torial

ch

In

his tutor alw e’lsho w you ho w

o blur the ed ges of prod uced by pri ad

e f am e,m ve len ses.Yo

o u se the A djustm ent brush tool cki g the p op ert es of vign et es lalso learn h ow

st dif erent colou s cou rtesy o the S plit To

o arget and g pa el.T

en ables you o m ake the colou s loo k l ke they’ve faded an d ch ange over and

e.W e’lalso dem on st ate how ow

o add a w ash of vintage sepia,

eal st c f m grain can rou gh up prist e i ages.T he Sp ot

Rem ovaltoolis designed o rem ove blem shes,bu t t can also w ork ke Pho osho p CC’s Clon e S am p oo .T urn over to

nd ou t how


BEFORE

187


1

Import the image

Before i mport in g our lightroom_before.dng start ing image in to Lightroom,it’s w orth copyi ng it from our p roject files onto your computer’s hard dr ive.N ow launch Lightroom.G o to File>Import P hotos and V ideo.U se the Source Panel to brow se to the shot.C lick Copy as D N G at the top of the Import w indow. C lick the Import button at the bottom-right.T his w ill copy the shot in to the Lightroom C atalog.

3

Tweak the overall tones of the image

C lick the D evelop icon at the top of the Lightroom w orkspace.T he D evelop module is L ightroom’s p ow erful digital darkr oom.From the histogram,w e can see that our shot has a healthy range of tones.To star t creating the w ashed-out looking tones of a vintage photograph,go to the Basic Panel on the right-hand sid e and dr ag the Exposure sli der to +� .��.Set the Cont rast slider to -67.

188

2

Examine the shot close-up

4


T o cr eate a conv in cin g vin tage image,it makes s ense to u se a suitable subject,such as this ti meless harbour scene.T he imported image w ill appear as a t humbnail in Lightroom’s L ibrary module.D ouble-click the thumbnail .You can click once again to zoom in and drag the cursor to pan around t he shot.T he Library module has a few Q uick D evelop photo-fixing tools,but to get creative w e’ll n eed to access the full D evelop modul e.

T o pr event the i mage from looki ng too w ashed out,d rag the Shadow s slid er to -�� to darken the shadow s in t he image a littl e.You’ll n otice that the photo is a li ttle soft due to camera shake.G o to the Presence section of t he Basic Panel and push C larity up to +�� .T his increases midtone contrast and makes delicate details in the bri ckw ork stand out.It also makes the shot look a little sharper.


5

Make selective colour tweaks

C lick t he Color Panel’s label.By changin g the hue of certain colours w e can mi mic the slightly surreal vintage colours that are caused by chemical reactions that occur over time in old prints.C lick the Blue sw atch.Set the H ue slider to -��.T his repaint s the blue boat’s hull w ith a cross-processed style greeny blue.Increase the Saturation to +�6 to emphasise this colour change.

7

Add a sepia tint

T oggle op en t he Sp li t T oni ng Pan el us in g the l it tle tr ian gle icon to the right of i ts label.To add a w ash of sepia to the shot,set the H ighlights H ue slider to �7.D rag the Saturation slider to 8�. T his w arms up the m id ton es i n the b ri ckw ork and w ater s ur face, w hile leavin g the contrast of the image unaltered.W e’ll see more of this sepia w ash w hen w e lighten the edges of the frame w ith a vignette in step ��.

6

Create vintage colours

8

Tidy things up

C lick the Red sw atch and push the H ue slider up to +7�.D rag the Luminance slider dow n to -8� to darken this s pecific colour.T his gives the russ et red hull a more sepia-lookin g paint job.T he edited colours have a stylised l ook to them that echoes the hand-painted w ash of colour that w as sometimes added to vintage monochrome shots in the early ��th century.

C lick to zoom in to the ladder at t he right of t he frame. T o rem ove clut ter such as t he dan glin g rope,choose the S pot Removal tool f rom the small toolbar under the histogram.Click C lone.Set Size to 7� and O pacity to �� .C lick to place a circle over a section of rope.A second circle w ill appear.D rag this second circle to a similar but clear patch of ladder on the right.T he content of the second circle is cloned into the first,creating a patch. 189


9

Continue cloning

You can click ei ther of the Sp ot R emoval tool’s circl es and use the arrow keys to fi ne-tune their positions.If you click the edge of a circle,you can drag to resize it and clone out more of the rope.C lick to place and position a few more circles to hide more of the danglin g rope.You can use this techniq ue to hide unw anted or d ist ractin g objects in your raw shots (or remove logos i f you’re creati ng stock imagery,for exampl e).

11

Add a vignette

G o to the Effects Panel.In the Post-C rop V ignetting section,set the Style drop-dow n menu to Color Pr iori ty.T his enables more of the sepia colour to bleed through before the corners fade to w hite.Set the A mount slider to + �� . Leave M idpoint at ��.Increase the Feather slider to 6 � so that there’s a more gradual blend betw een the centre of the photo and the lighter edges.

190

10

Tidy up the workspace

12

Go with the grain

W hen you’ve finished clonin g out the rope,click the Spot R emoval tool’s icon i n the toolbar to deselect i t. T his w il l r eplace i t w it h t he Z oom t ool.C li ck t he im age to zoom out and see the enti re image.For a less cluttered w orkspace,click the littl e arrow icon by each panel to collapse it .T oggle open the Effects Panel.You can use this to add a vintage vignette to the edges of the frame.

C lick the image to zoom in to its actual pixels.T his w ill enable us to see how effective our grain effect w ill look once w e apply it.G o to the G rain section of the Effects Panel.Set A mount to ��,Si ze to �� and leave R oughness at �7. T his emulates the or gani c-looki ng cl ump s of fi lm grain that you get in a genuine pr in t (rather than the bri ttle-lookin g digital nois e you get i n JPEG s).

T

h yo

L ADVANCED SKILLS

13

Crop in

15

Blur the edges

C lick t he im age to zoom back out to look at t he scene as a w hole.G rab the C rop O verlay tool.C lick and drag to select the enti re image.H old dow n Shi ft to constrain the C rop O verlay to the same shape as th e image,then d rag the corn er han dles in a lit tle to lose some of th e clut ter arou nd th e edges of th e frame. T his w illalso enable us to zoom i n on the boats and make them m ore promi nent i n the scene.

T o enhance the vignett ed edges,w e can blur them.G rab the A djustment br ush from the T ools panel(or press K ). Set C larit y,Sharpness and Saturati on to -�� .S et Size to ��.Leave Feather on a soft �� .C lick to place an Edi t p in at the t op left cor ner ofthe image. Now paint around the edges of the frame to blur and desaturate the vignetted edges. This effect helps to hide clutter and draw the eye to the boats. Click Done.

14

Enjoy non-destructive cropping

16

Create a preset

W hen you’ve fin ished tighteni ng the C rop overlay around the i mage,click D one t o apply t he crop.You’re croppi ng a raw file,so you can click back on the C rop O verlay tool’s icon at any t im e to fin e-tune t he compositi on t o restore previou sly cropped d etails.Because w e used a Post-C rop V ignette effect,w e w on’t lose any of the vi gnette corner s.T he vignette effect w illbe reapplied to the new compositi on.

O nce you’ve applied a w ide r ange ofcreative vi nt age effects to your im age,you can save t he adjustm ent s as a preset.Y ou can t hen app ly th e effects to oth er i mages in an instant.G o to D evelop>N ew Preset.T ype a name such as V in tage Effects Pr eset.You can tick C heck N one and then ti ck th e boxes man ually to includ e th e relevant sett ings (or leave everyt hi ng t icked t o make sur e that you i nclud e allt he effects). 191

T

L

h yo

ADVANCED SK ILLS

17

Apply your preset

L g h

Export the image

18

T o qui ckly apply your creative pr eset to another image, go to the Lib rary m odule and br ow se to the phot o.In the Q ui ck D evelop panel,click the Saved Preset dr op-dow n menu . Scrolldow n to t he U ser P resets secti on and click the V in tage Effects preset you created earlier .T hi s preset w illapp ly t he colour and t onalchanges as w ellas add grain effects.H ow ever,it w on’t apply th e bru sh str okes,crop th e shot o r clone ou t det ails.

Your edited file w illremain in Li ghtroom’s C atalog. T o create a JPE G version that you can email,go to File> Export.Set the Export drop-dow n menu to H ard D rive.In Export Locati on,click C hoose and select a folder to store the file.Scroll dow n to F ile Sett in gs and adjust t he Q ualit y slid er t o get a balance betw een qualit y and file size.Ify ou p lan to p r in t t he im age,choose the A dobe RG B (�� 8)C olor S pace.C lick Export .

m

g a

y d

Remove unwanted objects by cloning appropriate adjacent details over them 1 SPOT REMOVAL

3

1

4 2

The Spot Removal tool can be summoned by clicking this icon in the toolbar (or by pressing Q ).

2 CLONE OR HEAL You can make the Spot Removal tool clone pixels from one overlay to another. To blend the sampled areas more organically, click the Heal option.

3 FROM A TO B Place the first circle overlay over areas that you want to edit. Drag inside the second overlay to choose which pixels will be transplanted into the first.

4 RESIZE To change the areas being cloned or healed by a pair of overlays, click an overlay to activate its resize icon. 192

E 8 C S I V 4 E A D 1 G R T A P P E X E F O

DI S O VER RI T I N’ S ES SEL L I NG PHO O M G O FOR IFT

7 09:5 2016 4/ 22/0

D��t��C�mer� s

e ve e o LR � d C C .Eve � su e ked h h v�ce d ��t� s f ho s.W e so ub sh he ou �h es t es s � ou nd ,he� n� ou bu � c �m er�s �n d �en ses w h c on de nc e.

FREE G F S EVERY I SSU E Inc ud�n� v deo d�scs, ebooks nd c mer sett n� c rds

t he new ssue

A�so v � b�e on our t b�et or phone

/ b

c

h

Lightr oom

y o


Tur n dayinto night in Lightr oom Learn Lear n how to use the selecti selective adj ad justmen us tmentt tools tools in Lig L ightroom htroom to transfo trans form rm a dayti d aytime me p hot hoto into a nocturna n octurnall photo photo he b eauty of Ligh Ligh

T

oo m

s that that it bo asts advan ced

Cam era era Raw edi ng oo s.Th s is good new because Lightr Lightroom

s af ordable and

akes

no n-d estruct ve chan ges to to y ou r i ages.If you

an Elem ents ents user,or you ow n an o d vers on of Photoshop Photoshop CS,

en t’s w ellw orth orth do

alvers on of Lightr Lightroo m

oad

g the fuly ful y fun ct on

om

adob e.com

o get access access

to the atest aw ed ti g too s. Ligh Ligh

oo m

s design ed w th ph otograph otograph ers’t ers’typ cal

ph oto-f xing xing need s in ore creat ve com

nd ,so it it lacks m any of Photoshop

and s s ch as f

ers.I ers.I t en ables ables you to

prove exp osu e,correct e,correct colou r an d rem ove artefact efacts s such as ch om at c ab errat on .De spi e Ligh Ligh

oo

s p ho o-fixi

ed gree,it can b e used u sed in a creat ve cap aci y too, as yo u can see f om ou r before before and af er In

ages here.

his his tutor tutor al,w e’lsho e’ lsho w you how

o p od uce a co ou

ul

octurnal ci yscape f om a dayti e shot by w orki g enti el on

e raw raw

e.T he k ey tool yo

ln eed to b e able able to to turn

day into night night is the the A djust ent brush.W brush.W e’lshow e’ lshow you how o ed t t e bru sh’s attr attr bu es so that you can u se w ashes o dark no cturn cturn alb ue to darken skies and ad d brigh t,glow colou s to to w nd ow s and signs.Y ou lalso d scover how pins and 194

asks to to ide ide nti y an d m od

o u se

y p art cular cular str strok es.

BEFORE


Teach yourself Lightroom ADVANCED ADV ANCED SKILLS

AFTER

195

Teach you yours rse elf ADVANCED ADV ANCED SKILLS

1

Import the image

C opy the day_to_night_before.N EF start ing image to a folder on your hard drive.In Lightroom,go to File>Import Photos and V ideo.In the Source panel panel on the left,brow se to the folder containing the starting image and tick the box by its thumbnail. thumbnail.T T ick the Add button button at the top top of the w indow.C lick Import .T his w ill br ing the image image into Lightroom’s C atalog so that you can can edit i t.

3

Access the Develop module

T o get cr eative w it h t he raw fi le,you need the p rocess in g pow ers of tools such as the A djustment brush.T o access access these extra extra tools,click the D evelop evelop module icon at the top.T top.T he panels on the right right w ill change change to present present you w ith a host of image-editin image-editin g tools.H ow ever,before ever,before w e make the necessary necessary selective adjustment s,let’s give the shot some global tw eaks eaks to create a better starting point.

196

2

Use the Loupe

4

Cool down the image

Lightroom Lightroom imports the raw raw photograph photograph into its L ibrary module.D ouble-click the photo’s thumbn ail to activate the Loupe view so that you can get get a better look at the photo in close up.A lthough lthough the Q uick D evelop evelop Panel Panel on the right right enables you to tw eak the colours and tones,it l acks the more pow erful s elective adj adjustmen t tools t hat you’ll n eed for this day-to-night makeover. makeover.

T o cool dow n the p hoto’s c olour s,go to the B asic Panel and drag the Temperature Temperature slider d ow n to � �� (or type that value in to the adjace adjacent nt box).Set C ontrast to + ��.Set H ighlights ighlights to +�6 and and Shadow s to -�6.Push -�6.Push the Clari ty slider to +�� to increase increase the midtone contrast contrast and pop V ibrance up to +�� to give give the w eaker eaker colours colours a subtle boost w ithout overoversaturating the stronger ones.

Teach yours you rse elf ADVANCED ADV ANCED SKILLS

5

Add more contrast

T o d ramati cally darken the s hadow s and boost the i nt ensi ty of the highlights, highlights,move move dow n to t he Tone C urve panel.By panel.By default,the default,the curve is a straight diagonal diagonal line – or a linear curve – so no tonal changes changes have been made.C made.C lick t he Point C urve pop-up menu and choose choose Strong Contrast.T he curve curve dips dow n at the bottom-left bottom-left to darken the shadow shadow s,w hile risi ng near near t he top-right top-right to lighten the highlights.

7

Adjust the brush settings

C lick the A djustment brush i con below below the histogram. histogram.Set Set all the sliders in the panel panel below below to � to start w ith.T hen set set T emperatur e to -�� so that the b rus h w il l add cold blu e st rokes. D rop Exp osure to -�. -�.�� to d arken any areas that you pain t on.In on.In t he Br ush section below,set S ize to ��,Fea ��,Feather ther to ��,and ��,and Flow to �� . U ntick A uto M ask. ask.U U ntick Show Show Sele Selecte cted d M ask ask O verla verlay y (be (belo low w the main image).

6

Check your progress

8

Add deeper shadows

T ake a look at a before-an d-after view usi ng t he ic on. T hanks to ou r global ad just ment s,t he shot has a cooler colour temp erature that’s beginn ing to evoke a nocturn al look. T he dar kened shadow s ar e mor e moody and myst eri ous,i nkeeping keeping w ith a n ight-time ight-time theme,w theme,w hile the highlights highlights stand out in contrast.W e can can now start to get get more creative creative by targeting targeting and tw eaking eaking colours and tones l ocally. ocally.

C lick to place a grey grey Edit p in on the left-hand left-hand side of the image. image.T T his Edi t pi n enables you to control control the properties of all the strokes that you make usin g the current A djustment brus h tip settings.You settings.You can add as many Ed it pins to an image image as you like. Paint d ow n t he right-ha right-hand nd side of t he image image to selectively selectively modify the photo’s exposure an d temperature,and create a blue w ash of nocturnal shadow shadow s. 197


9

Reveal the mask

W hen you finish painting cold dark shadows on the righthand si de of the scene,let go of the mouse button.T he grey pin that controls t he colours,ton es and coverage of the A djustment brush w ill reappear.It’s the currently active Edit pin ,so it w ill have a black dot at its centre.By moving the cursor over the pin, you’ll s ee a red mask.T his enables you to s ee w hich areas are being adjusted by that part icular p in .

11

Erase your strokes

D on’t w orry if s ome of your strokes overlap the edge of the adjacent buil din gs,because you can tidy thin gs up later.In t he Brush panel,click the B icon to choose a new brush ti p for your sky-darkenin g brush.C lick the Erase icon.The cursor w ill change to a min us i con.R educe the Size to 8.� and set t he Feather to �� .Paint on t he image to remove the unw anted tints you added to the bui ldi ng’s edges.

198

10

Make new adjustments

12

Create the neon lighting

C lick the N ew option below the Adjustment brush icon.W e’ll create a new set of adjustments to darken t he clear patch of sky this time.T he sky is already blue, so set T emperature to ��.D rop the Exposure sli der to -�.8� an d set H ighlights to -�� to darken t he clear patch of sky.C lick to place a new Edit p in on t he sky,then paint t he sky to darken it and cool it dow n.

C lick N ew to create a new Edit pin.C lick the A button in the Brush panel.Cl ick to place the Edit pin insi de the top letter of the large yellow neon sign.Set Temperature to �� to w arm thin gs up.Set E xposure to �.�� to br ighten your st roked areas.T ake H ighlights up to ��.Push Shadow s up to ��.Reduce C larity to -76. For a vivid neon colour,push Saturation to 66.Paint over the letters to brighten them up.


13

Add the neon glow

15

Turn on the lights

C lick the N ew icon to set up an adjustment that w ill add a soft neon glow to your yellow sign.Cli ck to place a new Edit pin on one of the yellow letters.K eep the Effect settings the same as those in the previous step,but click the little colour icon to open the Select a C olor panel.C hoose a w arm yellow .Paint using a larger soft brus h tip over the si gn’s letters to enhance them w ith a yellow neon glow.

U se the N avigator to zoom in to a �:� view .Set the Br ush Size to �.� w ith a Feather of �� .Place a new A djustmen t brush Edit pin on the large foreground w indow on the right-hand si de of the image.Set T emperature to 68 and T int to ��.Push Exposure to �.�� .D rop C larity to -�� .Set Saturation to �6.C hoose a yellow colour.Paint over the w indow panes.If you make a mistake,press A lt to temporarily activate the Erase tool.

14

Extend the adjustments

16

Add a figure

C lick the Edi t pi n adjustment that you created in step ��.T he pin ’s settin gs lighten the letters w ithout colourin g them.You can now use that pin’s Eff ect settin gs to paint and li ghten the red neon letters and the yellow sign on the right-hand side of the image.Cl ick to select the neon glow pin you created in step �� and add a glow to the edges of the red letters and the yellow sign.

A dd a new A djustment brush Edit pin to the w indow. Set T emperature to -7�,Exposure to -�.�� and C ontrast to ��.D rop H ighlights to -�� ,Shadow s to -�� and C larity to -�� . Reduce Saturation to -�� and take Sharpness dow n to – ��.Pop N oise to 67,M oiré to �� and D efringe to �7.C hoose a yellow colour. D rop Feather to �� f or a harder edge to the brus h,then paint i n a silhouetted figure. 199

T

L

h yo

ADVANCED SK ILLS

17

Add more lights

18

R epeat t hese techniqu es to add mor e lights to t he scene.U se smallhar d-edged br ush ti ps to add light s to the tow er’s w in dow s.U se larger soft-edged t ips to add glow s to neon signs.Feelfree to click existi ng Edi t p in s and then use the Erase opti on to t idy them up.You can also adjust t he value of any Effects slid er t o fin e-tun e the look created by a par ti cular pi n.For a believeable ni ght scene,don ’t filli n allt he w in dow s!

2 1 3

4 5 6

200

Save a version

G o to the L ibr ary mod ule.To create a separate JPEG version oft he edit ed shot,go to File>Expor t.H ere you can select opti ons such as Bur n Fu ll-Sized JPEG .Set t he Exp ort To dr op-dow n menu to H ard D rive.C hoose a destination for your JPEG version (such as D esktop) in t he Expor t Location tab.C lick O K .You’llthen see a progress bar in Li ghtroom w hile the raw file is conver ted to a JPEG .

A

r s f

k d

t g e

Turn day into night – here’s a look at the key techniques used to create our neon-lit cityscape 1 PINS

4 FEEDBACK

Each Edit pin represents an area that has been edited with the Adjustment brush. The currently active pin displays a black dot, enabling you to modify the brush strokes and effects associated with that pin.

henever you use a menu command or keyboard shortcut, Lightroom will produce a label overlay confirming that command. This helps you to keep track of what’s going on in the image.

2 ERASE

5 MASKS

This brush tip has a minus icon at its centre, so it’s being used to erase any strokes that darken and cool down the sky if they overlap the edge of the building.

hen you hold the cursor over a pin, a red mask will appear, indicating which areas of the image that particular pin is altering. Here, a pin adds a glow to a neon sign.

3 BRUSH TIPS

6 DELETE

This tip has a plus icon in the centre, so it’s making colour and tonal changes to the sky. The narrow band at the edge of the tip displays the area that s feathered.

To remove an unwanted Edit pin and its associated effects, click it and then tap the Backspace key. The pin will vanish in a puff of animated smoke.

THE BEST PORTABLE GUIDE TO PORTRAIT PHOTOGRAPHY

ON SALE NOW! myfavouritemagazines.co.uk/photo

Teach yourself Lightroom LIGHTROOM MOBILE

2 2

T

L

h yo

LIGHTROOM MOBILE

L M

Discover how you can use Lightroom Mobile on your iPad to sync, edit, and publish your photos

20 4

Sync Lightroom Mobile

20 6

Working with Lightroom Mobile

20 8

Sort your Library with Lightroom Mobile

Sync Lightroom M obile w ith your desktop copy ofLightroom so you can snap a shot on an i Pad and send i mages to your desktop app’s Lib rary

C reate a collection ofp hotos in Li ghtroom and w atch it automatically appear in Lightroom M obile on your i Pad and vice versa

U se Lightroom M obile to add rati ngs and flags to your phot os,and to sort them using a vari ety ofcriteri a

210

212

Share your photos with Lightroom Mobile

216

Shooting super images with Lightroom Mobile

Present photos in Li ghtroom M obile as a slid e show ,or send t hem t o a w eb gallery or social med i a platfor m

You can take stun ni ng photos on your smartp hone usin g the camera modu le bui lt into Li ghtroom M obile

220

Lightroom Mobile’s powerful editing tools

W ith the latest u pdate,Lightroom M obile has become a robust editi ng toolin its ow n right - even on your smartphone!

Enhance images with Lightroom Mobile

Edit p hotos in L ightroom M obile and aut omat i cally app ly t he changes to raw fi les in your desktop copy ofLightroom

203

h

Lightr oom

y o

L IG H T R O O M M O B IL E GET THE FILES HERE:

http://bit. http://bit. ly/tylr2016 ly/tylr2016

DESKTOP

iPAD


Synchr onise Lightr oom Mobil e S ync Light Lightroo room m M obi obille w ith your your deskto d esktop p copy c opy of of Light Lightroo room m s o you you can ca n s end mobile mobile images images to your your des d eskt ktop op app’ a pp’s Library Librar y ghtroom

L

obi e is an app hat w

lrun on a tabl tablet

or sm ar ph on e.It’s a com com pan on app to the the ful ful

obi e w hi e on he go to

versi version of Lightroom CC that that un s on yo ur M ac or

and com posi on .Once you ho ok u p yo ur iPad t

PC.Th e m obi e and and d esktop vers on s of Lightr Lightroo

aW

ork seam essly to en able able you

o o gan se,edit se,edit and share

your photos photos f om your hom e or on the go To u se Lightroo m

ob e you ln eed to to sign u p for for an

Ad ob e I D so hat you can access access the the A do be Crea ve Clou d. T his en ables ables you

20 4

You can can then u se Lightroom

add at gs to to yo ur p ho os an d adjust adjust their colou ,tone

o create a col ect on of ph otos on yo ur

-Ficonnect on ,the ,the changes you’ve m ade to to you

ph otograph s in L ghtroo m Creat Creat ve Clou Clou d o

ob e w

lb e synced v a the the

e p otos in yo ur L gh troo m Librar Library.

ou can also snap sho s usi g yo ur tabl tablet et or sm artph on e’ cam era era and get them

o syn c autom at caly caly to a co ect on

n you r desktop copy of Lightroom .B efore ore w e show show you

desktop copy of Lightr Lightroo m and sync them via via the the Creat Creat ve

Lightroo Lightroo m

Clou d to Lightr Lightroo m

a gu de o get both v ersi ersion s of Lightr Lightroo oo m

ob e on you r portable devices devices

ob e’s sort g, ed ti g and an d sh ari g tri tricks, ere’ o alk o each o

er

Teach yours you rse elf LIGHTROOM MOBILE

1

Turn on synchronisation

In Li ghtroom CC on your desktop,click desktop,click the identity plate at the top-left to summ on a grey grey menu box.C lick the Start Start label next next to the Sync w ith Lightroom Lightroom M obile command.A command.A new message message box box w ill appear sayin sayin g that that Sync is on.Launch Lightroom Lightroom M obile on your your tablet.

3

Sign in on a smartphone

5

Add photos

O n the smartphone version of Lightroom Lightroom M obile you’ll be given given the option to choose choose A uto A dd N ew Photos. A ny shots that you you snap w ill then automatically automatically appear appear in a Lightro Lightroom om M obile collec collection.U tion.U ntick Sync O ver ver C ellular ellular if you w ant to avoid excee exceedin din g your data plan.

In the A dd Photos w indow ,tap the thumbnails of any iPad (or (or smartphone)photos you w ant to import into your Lightroom Lightroom M obile collection.A collection.A ti ck w ill appear appear on each each selected selected thumbnail.W hen you’ve finished,tap the tick at the top-right top-right and the photos w ill appear in t he Tablet collection.

2

Sign in on the tablet

4

Import automatically

6

View your synced collection

C lick the Sign In In button on the w elcome elcome screen. screen. Sign in to the Creative C loud using your your A dobe ID . W hen a messag message indicates that ‘Lightroom Lightroom w ould like to access access your photos’,click , click O K so you can import shots from your d evice’s C amera R oll.

In Li ghtroom M obile you’ll see a blank collecti on called called M y T ablet ablet Photos.Tap the three w hite dots dots at the bottom-right of the collection’s thumbn ail to summon a menu menu w ith options options such as Enable Enable A uto Add.T his w ill import any new photos you shoot on the tablet automatica automatically. lly.

W hen hen your mobile mobile device device is in range range o off a W i-Fi i-Fi connection it w ill syn c the T ablet collection collection via the C reative C loud to your Li ghtroom ghtroom Lib rary.In the Enable A ddress ddress Lookup w indow,T ick Enable so that that Lightro Lightroom om can pinp oint mobile photos photos in its M ap module. module. 205

h

Lightr oom

y o


http://bit. http://bit. ly/tylr2016 ly/tylr2016

DESKTOP

iPAD


W or kingwith Lightr oom Mobil e C reate a collectio collection n on your your des d eskt ktop op versi vers ion of Light Lightroom room and an d s ync it to to Light Lightroo room m M obi obille on your your portab p ortablle devices devices n th e previou previou s spread w e created created ou r

O

col ection n L gh troo m ph otograph s captured captured w

g the the three w hite do s at the bo

clud

Col ect on s pan elin elin he Lightr Lightroom Libra Libra y

om -left eft of an ds

o to to the

od ule ule an

righ t-clck t-cl ck the th e M y T ab et P otos co ection abe .Ch oo se Renam e f om

he con ext-se ext-sensi nsi ve po p-up

enu hat

app ears.If you enam e the col ect on n on e versi version of 20 6

lau om at caly caly be u pd ated i

ar ph on e,you can also syn syn c pho os f om you r com pu er

organi organise and ed t them

g Ren am e.Y ou can also also renam e the the co ection af er

t has been syn ced to to Lightr Lightroom on you r desktop. desktop.

or s

Lightr Lightroo m Libra Libra y w

oo

s reveal reveals a l st of com

,the ,the n am e change w

he other.A s w ellas syncing syncing ph otos snap snap ped on you r tablet

y Tab et

Pho os,b t you can re-label the col ect on n Ligh Ligh ob e by tapp

Lightr Lightroo

h a sm ar ph on e or tabl tablet

y d efau efau t t e co ection s cal ed

the co ect on s cover p oto.T

st

ob e by i po rt

To do

s yo u

h L ghtroom

obi e,so that that you can

hen you’ e aw ay f om your desktop. desktop.

eed o create col ect on s in Ligh Ligh troo m that

are are i struct structed ed o syn c w th Ligh Ligh troo m en able you o ch oo se precisely w

ob e.Col ect on

ch p ct

es are are accessibl

on bo h d esktop esktop an d m obi e devices at he sam e t

e.

Lightr Lightroo m send s l ghtw eight Sm art art P eview s to to you r m ob device.W ce.W hen you proces process s these these Sm art art P eview s in Lightroom ob e,the chan ges are app ed to you r origi alL gh troo aw

es,en abli g y ou

o ed t raw

es o n the tablet.

Teach yours you rse elf LIGHTROOM MOBILE

1

Create a collection

In Li ghtroom,go ghtroom,go to the Col lection s pane and click t he + shaped shaped N ew C ollections icon.C hoose hoose C reate reate C ollection from the pop-up pop-up menu.Label menu.Label the collection.G collection.G o to O ptions. T ick the S et as target col lecti on box.L eave the Sy nc w it h Lightroom Lightroom M obile box ticked.Cli ticked.Cli ck Create. Create.

3

Sync the collection

5

Resize the thumbnails

C lick the new collection’ collection’s label in the C ollection panel to see its contents.A s you add add new photos to this collection ,a ‘Syn cing p hotos’message hotos’message appears at the top-left of the Library module.T module.T his in dicates dicates the number of Smart Preview Preview s being uploaded uploaded to the C reative reative C loud.

T ap t he new coll ecti on’s thum bn ail to v iew it s syn ced contents .T hey’ll appear in t he same order as they appear in Lightroom.You can resize the thumbnails in the collection’ collection’s G rid view by pin ching to enlarg enlarge e or shrink them. T ap a thum bnai l t o vi ew the i mage full scr een.

2

Add to target collection

4

View in Lightroom Mobile

6

Enable offline editing

T o st art w it h,your new coll ecti on cont ain s n o p hotos. You can drag and drop appropriate photos from the Library module’s G rid view to add them to the collection collection manually.O r tap a photo’s thumbn ail to select it and press B.T his activates activates the A dd to T arget arget Collection command.

Launch Lightroom Lightroom M obile on your your smartphone or iPad.A iPad.A s w ell as as the origina originall M y T ablet ablet Photos Photos collection ,you’ll see a thumbn ail for your n ew Lightroomsourced sourced collection (as long as as your device is syn ced to W i-Fi so that it can access the Smart Preview s). s).

Lightro Lightroom om M obile uses uses W i-Fi i-Fi to sho show w Smart Previe Preview ws stored in the C reative reative Cloud.If Cloud.If you w ant to w ork on a collection collection of images images w ithout a W i-Fi connection,go connection,go to the collection ’s thumbn ail and tap the three w hite dots to access access a menu list.T hen tap tap Enable O fflin e Editing. 207 207

h

Lightr oom

y o



DESKTOP

iPAD


Sor t images with Lightr oom Mobil e O rganise your synced collections by adding ratings and flagging photos to pick or reject them ce yo u’ve created col ect on s in Ligh troo m or

O yo

Lightroo m

ob e,you can begin to sort you

sho s to f ag u p avou ri es,or m ark som e fies or rejection .Y ou can also h gh gh t i ages that

e p ou d of by using star rat gs. I yo u

ag a fie o r add a rat g in Ligh

oo

,then these

chan ges are add ed o the fie’s m etadata and autom at cal synced o the vers on of he ph oto in Lightroom

ob e’

equ valen t col ect on .I n the sam e w ay,i yo u rate a ph oto n Ligh

oo m

ob e,the assign ed at g o r fag bad ge w

app ear by he sam e ph oto in he Lightroo m col ect on T 20 8

s versat

y e ab es yo u o start ati g o n yo r desk top

com pu er and then co

ue review

g,rat ng an d flaggi

yo ur f es on yo ur iPad or sm artph on e.I yo ur tablet lacks access to a

-Fico ne ct on ,yo u can stilso rt yo ur fies.

Th e changes that you

ake w

on ce you conn ect o

-Filater on.

y add yo u can oth Ligh

g rat gs an d

lbe synced w

h L ghtroom

ags to a col ect on of ph otos

d part cu ar pictures m ore easi y n the future. oo m and Ligh

oo m

ob e provide fi ers t at

en able you o sort t e p cks from the rejects,or d splay fies according o speci c star rati gs.T o see an y star rati gs an ag badges assigned o each thum bn ai,perform a t ogered ap n the G rid view

Teach yourself LIGHTROOM MOBILE

1

Pinch to zoom

In Li ghtroom M obile,tap to view the contents of a collection.T hey are displayed in the G rid vi ew as thumbnails.If you tw o-finger pinch the G rid vi ew to zoom in,the thumbnails enlarge,making it easier for you to see each photo.You can also pinch to shrink the thumbnails.

3

Rate your files

5

Filter by rating

A djacent to the t hree flag icons you’ll see a group of stars.By tappin g these icons you can assign a five star rating to favourite files and a low er star rating for less successful images or those that need processing to fix problems w ith colour,composition or tone.

T ap S how A ll .You can al so c hoose t o di sp lay thumbnails that have a rating that is greater than or equal to a specified number or st ars.If you tap the ≥ icon you can change it to a more specific = icon so that only images w ith a chosen ratin g are dis played.

2

Flag your files

4

Filter by flag

6

Choose a custom order

T ap a p hoto’s t humbn ail to v iew it ful l s creen.If you click the image and sw ipe vertically you can summon a flag overlay that features three icons:Pi ck,U nfl ag and R eject. A ltern atively,tap the three vertical dots at the bottom-left of the w orkspace and tap one of the three flag icons.

O nce you’ve flagged or s tar-rated your p hotos,tap the arrow -shaped back icon at the top-left of the screen to go back to the collection’s G rid view.C lick the drop-dow n icon below the collection’s name to open a menu.T ap Picked to only display i mages flagged w ith t hat d esignation.

In L ightroom you can drag a thumbnail i mage into any position,regardless of its rating.T o see this l ayout in Lightroom M obile,tap the Sort by C apture T ime icon and change it to C ustom O rder.Lightroom M obile’s thumbs w ill change position to match the order in Lightroom. 209

h

Lightr oom

y o

BEFORE



AFTER


Edit images with Lightr oom Mobil e Edit photos in Lightroom M obile and automatically apply the changes to raw files in Lightroom ce yo u’ve rated and sorted yo ur syn ced co ection

O

of ph otos using L ghtroom si g the app s array o pic

obi e,you can en oy

oo s to process yo ur

es’colou s,ton es an d com po sition w thou

being ethered to y ou r desktop. Th s m eans that you can ed you r ph otos on the go and you ve m ade in L ghtroom col ection

hen sync the adjustm ents hat obi e to yo ur Light oom

hen yo ur tablet s conn ected to W

ob e co ect on s p ho os,to exp eri en t w ob e co ection aren’t t e raw

h di eren

210

yo u ried o store an d edit

es is that you can fit hu dreds o

or s ar ph on e,process them he chan ges hat you

n L ghtroom

art

em on a tablet obi e and then

ake to colou ,ton e and com po si on

lb e ap pl ed o he aw

es in Ligh

usi g Ligh troo m

oo

ob e,cl ck the Reset bu

cam era.Yo u can also reset he i

es stored on yo gh er Sm art Preview

Preview

lu p

es in it.T e clever thi g abo t

estore the fi e to its origi allook

oo

oo ks.As w e m ention ed earler,the ph otos in a Lightroo com pu er.T hey e sm aler and

the o rigi al aw

.A d

t turn

ou t that yo u do n’t ke the ch ang es yo u’ve m ade o a f

-Fi.Y ou can

even app y on e-cl ck creat ve p esets to yo ur L gh

Yo ur tablet w ou d soo n

On ce yo u’ve ed Lightroo m

es.

en cap

on .T

sw

red by the

age in Lightroom

ed a sh ot’s colou s an d on es i

obi e you can toggle bet een the processe

picture an d the o rigi alb y perform

g a hree-f ger tap.


1

Display a histogram

T ap a thum bn ail of a shot to v iew it ful l s creen.If you use a tw o-finger tap you can summon a histogram.In this example t he histogram’s graph is bunched to the left, indi cating that the shot i s un der-exposed.Tap the three vertical w hite dots at the bottom.

2

Adjust the tones

T ap t he A djust icon .T ap E xpos ure.D rag the s li der ri ght to brighten the Exposur e Value by � �.��.T he histogram slides right,indicating stronger mid tones and highlights.T ap C ontrast and set a value of ��.D rag Blacks to -�7 and W hites to ��.

3

Create a mono conversion

4

Choose a shape

T he i mage is almos t mon ochrome,so w e can tap Saturation and drag the slider to -�� for a blackand-w hite conversion.T here’s lots of unw anted space in the shot,so tap the C rop icon at the bottom to improve the composition.

A C rop overlay appears over the photo.U se a tw ofinger tap to cycle betw een different overlay grids. T ap A spect .T he shot ’s s ubject w il l s uit a sq uare s hape,so click t hat option .D rag the edge of the overlay to tighten the crop.D rag outsid e the overlay to rotate it and strai ghten it .

5

Correct white balance

6

Apply a preset

If a shot is too w arm or too cool,tap A djust and t hen sw ipe to W hite Balance.T ap A s Shot to access a range of presets.T ap to apply any of t hem to the image.To perfor m a custom w hite balance,tap the Selector eyedropper.D rag the cursor to a w hite area and tap the tick.

T ap t he Fi lms tr ip icon to c hoose an other thum bn ail from your collecti on.T ap the Presets icon.T here’s a huge range of presets to choose from.T ap C reative.H ere w e’ve added a Selenium T one preset.W e’ve also added a V ignette from the Effect presets. 211

Teach your sel fLightroom L IG H T R O O M M O B IL E GET THE FILES HERE:


Publish with Lightroom Mobile P resent photos in Lightroom M obile as a slideshow , or send them to a w eb gallery or s ocial media platform s w e ll a s e n a b g y o u t o s o r t y o u r s h o s a n d o v e r c o m e p r o b le m s w h c o l o u , o n e a n d c o m p o s i o n , L g h o o m M o b e is g e a r e d u p o e t y o u s h a r e y o u r p h o t o g r a p h s w t h f r ie n d s , a m (n d o l o w e r s ) n a v a r ie t y o f w a y s . f y o u a n t t o m a k e a e s e n t a t o n o m y o r i P s s c r e e n (o a c l e n t a t a w e d a ir fo r e x a m p l e ), t h e n y o u c a n s e t u p a s l d e s h o w n a fe w a p s , a n d e v e n a d d a n i m a te d a n s i t io n s b e t w e e n e a c h s h o t . y o u e u n d e r p re s su r e to k e e p y o u r T e r fe e d u p d a te d t h a c o n s ta n t f o w o f n e w c o n e n , L g h t ro o m M o b e w r e s iz e a p o t o a u o m a t ic a l y t o s u t T e r ’s r e q e m e n a n d u p lo a d i t o y o u r T e r a c c o u t .

A

Yo u c a n a l s o a d d y o u r L g h t r o o c t u r e s to n e w s le t te r s o r p e s e n t b lo g s , c o u r te s y o f d o b e Sa te . o c o b i n e e x t a n d i a g e s in c r e c o m o r t o f y o r i P s s c r e e n . Yo u o r A d o b e Sa te ( d a d o w n lo a d s t a r t s i g t h e s h a r i g o t io n s i n Yo u c a n e v e n s e L g h o o m M o b c o l e c t io n s t a ig h t to t h e w e b , s o t n a b r o w s e r. f a n y o n e c o e n t s n f o r m a t o n l b e a d d e d t o t h e r L g h t ro o m M o b e c o e c t io n

Choose some shots h u s h a r o n y r ig h 212

W h e n v i e g a a t h e o p r ig h t . b n a i s to a d d a t e ( t h o u g h f y o u s h a re o n e i a g e t to s e e y o r s h a r

c o e c t io n , a p S a re in ic k t o t h e o n e s h a r i g t a t a t i e ). i g o p t io n s .

a p t h e h e e s t h a o T a p t h e

m

M o b e p o c e s s e d e m a s s l c k - o o k i n g f e e a p p e n a b l e s y o v e w a y s f o m h e h o u d s e e a n a d v e r t k ) h e n y o u s t L g h t ro o m M o b e . e t o s h a re a n e n t i h a t a n y o e c a n v i e w o r ‘ k e s ’ t h e s h o t , t h i e le v a n t i a g e in y o u r

t h s a t s

Share shots on Facebook S a r e ic o e n u . a p t y o u a n e r y o u c t ic k a t th

n t t a n e t o p

p l a ce t ( c h a M e o r f r e

a p a o in t e m s Pb l n d s a

n ic o n ro d u c n a n d l ic o r n d

(u c h e y o u r s e le c t F ie n d e a m y t o

a s Fc e b o o a g e s , c h t h e a p p o p s ) . a p Ps s o e n o y . i

k ). o o s e r ia t e t a n d r

y p a n a u L

e s o m e te x t a lb u m d e n c e g h t ro o l

T

h yo

L LIGHTROOM MOBILE

WEB


3

Share in a web gallery

W hen view ing a collection i n G rid view,tap the sharing icon at the top r ight and then tap Share C ollection i n th e menu list.T ap Share in t he next box that appears.T he shots w illbe uploaded and shared i n a w eb gallery.C lick S hare L in k to send t he on lin e collecti on’s U R L to fr ien ds,fami ly o r clien ts.

4

Share as a slide show

V iew ers ofyour onlin e collection can vi ew it as a slid e show in t heir brow ser.Ifyou tap the Present option in Li ghtr oom M obi le’s shari ng menu list you can display a slid e show on your iP ad or smartphone.D uri ng the slide show you can p ause it and change propert ies such as slide d urati on and transition type. 213

Teach yourself Lightroom is also available as a - part video course. Choose either the DV D edition or the interactive iPad app and discover another great way to learn

Easy-to-use interface helps you focus on learning Photoshop

Learn entirely at your own pace by pausing the action at any time

Excl sive DVD O er

The DV D version comes in a stylish protective case for easy filing

S av e

40 Use code M FM DV D and pa y just . f or the DV D normal price .

G et the D V D version today from our secure online store:

w w w .myfavouritemagazines.co.uk/photo

h

Lightr oom

y o



Shootingwith Lightr oom Mobil e You can take stunning photos on your smartphone using the camera module built into Lightroom M obile

A

ou gh Ligh troo m users w

lu sual y u se pret

ser ou s cam era ki ,m any of us also take casual pic

es on ou r s artph on es too .I n act,there’

a grow ng art

T he cam era m od

ovem ent in m obi e ph otography.

e bu t

o L gh

oo m

ob e is real

sef .T e first reason s that it offers m ore adv an ced cam era con

ols t at you r sm artph on e’s bu

ecessar y provide,

cl di g w

com pensat on adjust ent. 216

-in ap p w on

e b alance and exp osu

Seco d is that you can u se a s allselect on of sho otthrou gh ’presets t at app y a sp eci c i age effect to y ou otos,bu t n a n on -d estr ctive w ay.I t’s lke u si g regu ar Ligh troo m presets in

at yo u can

od

y the sett gs or

ch oo se a dif erent preset at any ti e. Th e thi d eason s t at any pic ures you Lightroo m Lightroo m

ake w

h the

obi e cam era are autom at caly ad ded o yo ur brary an d syn chron sed w

h y ou r Lightroo

Catalog on yo r desktop com pu er.B ri ant!


1

Interface

A fter tapping on the Lightroom M obile app on your smartphone or tablet and choosing the camera icon in the bottom-right of the screen,the app is ready to go.W hen first loaded up you’re confronted w ith a live view image of w hat’s in fr ont of your mobi le device’s lens,along w ith several buttons on the screen.To the top left is the option to turn the camera

2

Information overlays

C lick on the grid i con to access the different inf ormation overlays.T he overlays available in the app contain sp iri t level,1 x 1 square crop and grid display options that lay over the live view feed coming from the camera.T he spirit level uses your smart phone or tablet’s accelerometer to mon itor your image’s horizontal and vertical alignment,w hich it displays through

around t o in stead use the device’s f ront-facin g camera (for those w ho w ant to take a selfie)and at the bottom-left i s the option to quit the camera app.O ver on the right-hand sid e w e have the self-tim er,gri d and crop information overlays,exposure,w hite balance and fl ash controls.A s w ell as these controls w e can also choose to use a preset filter through the overlapping circles icon at the top-right,the shutter button in the middle and i mage review button on t he bottom-right.

a broken centre lin e and graticule in the centr e of the dis play.T his enables you to make sure your shots are level,facilitating straight horizons.T he 1 x 1 crop makes it easy to visualise your s hot in a square crop,for those of us w ho w ant to share our photographs straight to Instagram and other apps and w ebsites.A nd t he grid display lends itself to the stickler photographer in side of us w ho w ants to hit the rule of thirds each and every time. 217


3

White balance

4

Presets

T he Li ghtroom mobi le ap p gives you a choi ce of si x different w hite balance options to choose from,w hich is somethin g you’d usually expect to see on a D SLR ,not necessaril y a smartphone.C lick on the eyedropper i con from the main in terface and there are the usual preset tr opes that you’d expect to see,including A utomatic W hite Balance,T ungsten,Fluorescent,

Found by pressing the icon w ith overlapping circles that looks like a lens fi lter being attached to a D SLR ,w e have five presets to choose from in the app.T hese are:H igh Cont rast, Flat,W arm Shadow s,H igh Contrast B& W ,and Flat B& W .You can immedi ately see the effect t hat they give w hen you tap on each one, because the app applies the fil ter over the live view feed,enabling

218

D aylight and C loudy settings.But the app also has a clever w ay of getti ng around custom w hite balance setup,and that’s through the handy C olour Picker option rather t han complicated manual adjustment s.Si mply tap the colour picker opti on and fil l the frame w ith the colour that you w ant to set your w hite balance against (light grey or w hite smooth surfaces usually w ork w ell)and the app does the rest,to enable you to achieve the tone you w ant.

you to choose the one that best suits your shot.Essentially these presets alter contrast and colour to manipulate the image into different styles.Tr y H igh Contrast to add vibrancy to your photographs,or Flat to create a muted pallette.M eanw hile W arm Shadow s increases orange tones to create a w arm,sunny look.Blacks look deeper and w hites brighter in H igh Contrast B& W than they do in Flat B& W ,so you can create a more modern or a subd ued feel to black and w hite photos.


5

Flash

6

Exposure

O f course Lightroom,like most smartphone camera apps, has a flash function.C lick on the familiar lightning bolt flash icon and the options that appear are O n,O ff or A uto.Set it to O n and the flash w ill alw ays fire each time the shutter button is p ressed,regardless of the natural li ghting available.T he reverse is tr ue for O ff.A uto enables the app to decide w hether it ’s dark

By cli cking on the black and w hite plus and minus icon, you can alter the exposure settings manually through the app by +3 or -3 stops,by scrolling up or dow n the slid ing scale. A gain this is preview ed in the live view to help you choose.T his is useful in most circumstances,but w ill stil l struggle w ith shooting directly into the sun or into a deep,dark cave.

enough for t he flash to fire,and isn ’t alw ays a parti cularly reli able judgement b ecause it depends on the meter readin g that the app is takin g from the su bject you’re photographing.Low -key photographs suffer from A uto triggering the flash w hen it is n’t w anted,so there are times w hen you need to override the A uto function by tur ning the flash on or off.T his is easy to do and only takes a second,w ith the image preview helpin g you to quickly decid e if it ’s necessary.

7

Self-timer

T he sel f-ti mer,sel ected v ia t he st op w atch i con,gives us the option of choosing betw een O ff,2,5 and 10 seconds delay.This i s perfect if you w ant to grab a quick snap on your ow n or w ith a fr iend,further than an arm’s length from the lens.Pop the camera on the floor or against a w all and press t he shutter button.T he shutter button then counts dow n unti l it takes. 219

h

Lightr oom

y o



Mobil e’ s power f ul editingtool s W ith the latest update,Lightroom mobile has become a robust editing tool in its ow n right – even on your smartphone! hen you syn chronise you r

W

dev ces,you DN

ages o you r

ob

-based sm art preview s that can n ever heless

store allo

on

e sh ari g sm aler-sized A do be he adjustm ents hat you m ake.Th ese

allo

ake are

on -d estructive’ age o

you r desktop com pu er version o Lightroo m and then carr 220

he chan ges that you

Ear y version s of Ligh ad

ade on you r

ob e device w

at version autom at caly. oo m

ob e had elat vely m od est

st en t features avai able,bu t they’ve stead y evo ved

nto a surprisi gly p ow erful an d u seful set of

and can b e m odi ed or rem oved at any ti e. A d th s st lapp es i yo u start ed ti g an

ying he picture on you r m ob e dev ce in he ap p.

have been add ed o

ork in he sam e w as as they d o in he d esktop Lightroom app cat on – allthe ch ang es you

od

hen yo u look at he i age on yo ur desktop com pu er aga n,

con kn ow

age-ed

ols,as our w alkthrou gh exam ples dem on st ate.G et ese feat

es to b oo st yo ur M ob e edi

g con

den ce.


1

Tone curve

T he ton e cur ve open s in parametric mode w here it breaks dow n your image into four disti nct sections:H ighlights,Lights,D arks and Shadow s,(in order descending in bri ghtness ).If y ou tap and d rag your

2

Local adjustments

A n excellent addition to Lightroom M obile is the ability to introduce N D grads.You can adjust t emperature,tin t and exposure, contrast,highlights,shadow s,w hites, blacks,clarity,dehaze,saturation,

finger in one of these sections and then sli de up and dow n you’ll not ice a change in your image.If you w ant to in crease the bandw idth of a section,click the grey sli ders below the image and drag them to the left or right.You can be more precise by tapping on the section name along the

settings panel at the bottom of the screen and then scrolling left and ri ght on t he slider.By tapping on the M ode button you can move from parametric editing to single colour channels:red,green and blue,as w ell as RG B combined.This is useful for photos w ith a colour cast.

sharpness,noise,moire,defringe,colour hue and saturation for the colour hue. You can choose N D grad selection (named Lin ear selection)or R adial selection.T he R adial selection tool enables you to draw and morph circles and ellipses on your image to affect only that area.T appin g

on the bigger control handle and sliding up and dow n in creases and reduces the feathering of the selection.Look to the top of the w indow and you’ll fin d a plus icon to add anot her radial selecti on.If you need to invert that selection,hit t he invert button (the cir cle in a rectangle). 221


3

Split toning

4

Dehaze

Split toning adds colour control in the shadow s and highlights of an i mage.It enables y ou to achieve the balance of w arm and cool tones that you w ant,by adjusti ng the shadow s and highlights in isolation

A useful new feature that’s new to Lightroom as a w hole, and available in the mobile app,is the D ehaze tool.It adds even mi d-tone contrast and boosts the saturation of images subtly.D ehaze w orks w ell on

222

from one another.Let’s say w e w ant w arm shadow s to accentuate the streetli ghts in our image here,and cooler highlights in the sky.To do this,click on H ighlights H ue and drag the slid er to a blue hue. It looks good at the default Saturation setti ng of 50,so w e’ll leave it at that.

N ext,click Shadows H ue and pick a w arm colour,such as orange.T his creates quite a dramatic eff ect,so w e’ll d ecrease the Saturation t o around 15.If you w ant to alter the balance betw een the H ighlights and Shadow s,tap Balance and move the sli der to the left and ri ght to adjust it .

photos w ith large portions of mid-tone grey,as you w ould expect to s ee in a hazy or foggy shot.W e can reduce the haze in this rally photograph,for example,by increasing the D ehaze amount to +50. T his makes i t look br ighter and livel ier w ithout becoming over-saturated.O r on

the other hand,if w e w ant to accentuate the haze effect then w e can reduce it to -12 for a more w ashed-out look,although it doesn’t seem to w ork quite as w ell at doing this.To add a convincing hazy effect t o i mages,then,you’ll need to make fur ther adjustment s usin g other tools.


5

Colour and B&W

6

Vignette

In the C olour and B& W tab are some intuitive controls to modify colours.T apping on H ue overlays colourful slid ers on your image.T ap and drag left and ri ght to change the hue of a specific colour.

T he vi gnetti ng tool boost s those photos that need extra emphasis on the subject.You can apply a black or w hite vignette w ith varying intensity by tapping on A mount and moving the slider l eft for black or ri ght

W e turned the blues more cyan and the greens more green.N ext w e reduced the green chann el’s l umin ance to darken the foliage behind the car to push focus onto the bri ghter car.You can adjust saturation on all eight colour channels as w ell,w hich can even out skin tones.Tapping on the

B& W button sw itches the photograph into a black and w hite photo that w e can alter single colour channels of.By boosting a particular colour it makes it brighter (posit ive luminance)and by attenuati ng a colour w e darken in ,meaning w e can be more selective than w ith a brush.

for w hite.For a subtle effect w e used -20 for a slight darkening around the frame. M idpoint selects w here the vignette stops, Feather changes the blur to the vign ette’s edges,and R oundness morphs its shape. T appi ng on the H ighli ghts b utton di sp lays three functions,H ighlight Priori ty,C olor

Priority and Paint O verlay.U se H ighlight Priority to suppress vignetting on the highlights in your photo.Color P riority suppresses vignetting on colours around the edge of the frame.A nd Paint O verlay masks anything,regardless of brightness or colour,w ith t he vignette. 223

Teach Yourself Lightroom - 2016 UK.pdf

Recommend Documents